Phone & Features Guide. Edition Eleven

Transcription

1 Phone & Features Guide Edition Eleven

2 Contents Introduction To The Guide Star2Star Supported Phones Polycom Phones a). Answering a Call b). Making a Call c). Microphone Mute d). Holding a Call e). Transferring a Call f). Ending a Call g). Creating a 3 Party Conference Call h). Volume Controls i). Missed Call Display j). Do Not Disturb k). Changing Ringtones l). Voic Access m). Speed Dials n). Polycom Buddy Watch / Presence Feature o). Call Park p). Expansion Modules q). Phone Options Polycom IP 4000 and IP 6000 Conference Phones a). Answering a Call b). Making a Call c). Microphone Mute d). Holding a Call e). Transferring a Call f). Ending a Call g). Creating a 3 Party Conference h). Volume controls i). Do Not Disturb j). Missed call display k). Voic Access l). LED Indicators m). Call Park n). Phone Options Polycom IP 5000 Conference Phone a). Answering a Call b). Making a Call c). Microphone Mute d). Holding a Call e). Transferring a Call f). Ending a Call g). Creating a 3 Party Conference Edition Eleven Page 2 of 289

3 h). Volume controls i). Do Not Disturb j). Missed call display k). Voic Access l). LED Indicators m). Call Park n). Phone Options Polycom Productivity Suite Software Grandstream Phones a). Answering a Call b). Making a Call c). Microphone Mute d). Holding a Call e). Transferring a Call f). Ending a Call g). Creating a 3 Party Conference Call h). Volume Controls i). Do Not Disturb j). Missed Call Display k). Changing Ringtones l). Voic Access m). Phone Options n). Speed Dials o). Call Park Polycom VVX500 Business Media Phone a). Phone Views b). Answering calls c). Placing calls d). Ending calls e). Headsets f). Responding to Incoming calls g). Holding calls h). Transferring Calls i). Conference Calls j). Forwarding Calls k). Do Not Disturb l). Voic m). Recent Calls n). Contact Directory o). Recording Calls p). Playing Recorded Calls q). Using the Browser r). Push-to-Talk (PTT) s). Calendar t). Using a Mouse and Keyboard with your phone u). Logging into Phones Edition Eleven Page 3 of 289

4 v). Locking/Unlocking the Phone w). Customizing your Phone x). Administrative Tasks S2S 3000 Softphone a). Answering a Call b). Making a Call c). Microphone Mute d). Holding a Call e). Transferring a Call f). Ending a Call g). Creating a 3 Party Conference Call h). Volume Controls i). Do Not Disturb j). Missed Call Display k). Changing Ringtones l). Voic Access m). Speed Dials n). Call Park S2S 3000 Softphone Guide S2S 3000 Softphone Download / Transfer license to another PC S2S 3000 Softphone - Audio Device Setup Panasonic KX-TGP500 Phones a). Supplied accessories b). Setting up the base unit c). Setting up the handset d). Handset features e). Answering a Call f). Making a Call g). Microphone Mute h). Call Waiting i). Transferring a Call j). Conference Calls k). Call Share l). Phonebook m). Call Forwarding n). Changing the ring count o). Do not disturb p). Block anonymous calls q). Changing the handset name r). Setting Date and Time s). Updating the base unit software t). Registering a handset to the base unit u). Using Caller ID v). Voic w). Intercom x). Belt Clip Edition Eleven Page 4 of 289

5 y). Wall mounting charger z). Base unit mounting Spectralink 8400 Series Wireless Telephone a). Home Screen b). Session Manager c). Answering a Call d). Making a Call e). Managing active calls f). Holding a call g). Resuming a call h). Muting a call i). Speakerphone j). Transferring a call k). Conference calls l). Forwarding calls m). Do Not Disturb (DND) n). Speed Dial o). Voic p). Battery Charging q). User Settings snom Phones a). Answering a Call b). Making a Call c). Microphone Mute d). Holding a Call e). Transferring a Call f). Ending a Call g). Creating a 3 Party Conference Call h). Volume Controls i). Do Not Disturb j). Missed Call Display k). Changing Ringtones l). Voic Access m). Speed Dials n). Call Park ( Key System Mode ) o). Expansion Modules p). Phone Options q). PA1 Paging Device snom m3 IP DECT Wireless Phone a). Answering a Call b). Making a Call c). Microphone Mute d). Holding a Call e). Transferring a Call f). Ending a Call g). Creating a 3 Party Conference Edition Eleven Page 5 of 289

6 h). Volume controls i). Missed call display j). Voic Access k). How to Lock / Unlock the keypad l). Call Park Cisco Phones (SPA525G2) a). Answering a Call b). Making a Call c). Microphone Mute d). Holding a Call e). Transferring a Call f). Ending a Call g). Creating a 3 Party Conference Call h). Volume Controls i). Missed Call Display j). Do Not Disturb k). Changing Ringtones l). Voic Access m). Directory n). Call Park o). Speed Dials p). Attendant Console (Expansion Modules) q). Advanced Features (Bluetooth) q). Advanced Features (Bluetooth Mobile Phone) (contd) q). Advanced Features (Bluetooth - Headset) (contd) q). Advanced Features (Charging Your Mobile Phone) n). Advanced Features (Playing MP3 Files on Your Phone) Cisco Phones (SPA50xG Series and SPA303G) a). Answering a Call b). Making a Call c). Microphone Mute d). Holding a Call e). Transferring a Call f). Ending a Call g). Creating a 3 Party Conference Call h). Volume Controls i). Missed Call Display j). Do Not Disturb k). Changing Ringtones l). Voic Access m). Directory n). Call Park o). Speed Dials p). Attendant Console (Expansion Modules) Cisco Phones Configuring the SPA500S Attendant Console(s) Cisco Phones (7940 / 7960 Series) Edition Eleven Page 6 of 289

7 a). Answering a Call b). Making a Call c). Microphone Mute d). Holding a Call e). Transferring a Call f). Ending a Call g). Creating a 3 Party Conference Call h). Volume Controls i). Missed Call Display j). Do Not Disturb k). Changing Ringtones l). Voic Access m). Directory n). Call Park Yealink SIP-T20P Telephone a). Making a Call b). Answering a Call c). Placing a call on Hold d). Do Not Disturb e). Forwarding Calls f). Transfer Calls g). Conference Calls h). Parking Calls i). Directed Call Pickup j). Anonymous Call k). Voic l). Contact Directory Yealink SIP-T22P Telephone a). Making a Call b). Answering a Call c). Placing a call on Hold d). Do Not Disturb e). Forwarding Calls f). Transfer Calls g). Conference Calls h). Parking Calls i). Directed Call Pickup j). Anonymous Call k). Voic l). Contact Directory Yealink SIP-T26P Telephone a). Making a Call b). Answering a Call c). Placing a call on Hold d). Do Not Disturb e). Forwarding Calls Edition Eleven Page 7 of 289

8 f). Transfer Calls g). Conference Calls h). Parking Calls i). Directed Call Pickup j). Anonymous Call k). Voic l). Contact Directory Yealink SIP-T28P Telephone a). Making a Call b). Answering a Call c). Placing a call on Hold d). Do Not Disturb e). Forwarding Calls f). Transfer Calls g). Conference Calls h). Speed Dial i). Directed Call Pickup j). Anonymous Call k). Voic l). Text Messages m). Contact Directory Yealink SIP-T32G Telephone a). Making a Call b). Answering a Call c). Do Not Disturb d). Muting a call e). Putting a call on Hold f). Call Waiting g). DSS Keys h). Anonymous Call i). Auto Redial j). Intercom k). Directory l). Voic m). Transfer a call n). Forwarding a call o). Conference Calls Yealink SIP-T38G Telephone a). Making a Call b). Answering a Call c). Do Not Disturb d). Muting a call e). Putting a call on Hold f). Call Waiting g). DSS Keys h). Anonymous Call Edition Eleven Page 8 of 289

9 i). Auto Redial j). Intercom k). Directory l). Voic m). SMS n). Transfer a call o). Forwarding a call p). Conference Calls Yealink EXP38 Expansion Module a). Connect to the phone b). Connect to the next module c). Connect cords d). Configuration e). Programming Keys Yealink EXP39 Expansion Module a). Connect to the phone b). Connect to the next module c). Connect cords d). Configuration e). Programming Keys Analog Phones a). Answering a Call b). Making a Call c). Microphone Mute d). Holding a Call e). Transferring a Call f). Ending a Call g). Creating a 3 Party Conference Call h). Volume Controls i). Missed Call Display j). Do Not Disturb k). Changing Ringtones l). Voic Access m). Speed Dials n). Call Park ***Star2Star System Features*** Call Pickup Intercom Paging Direct Dial to Voic Setting up your Voic Voic Guide Voic to Mobile Service Providers to SMS Gateways (Cell Phone Text Message Alerts) Find-Me / Follow-Me CallerID Blocking Edition Eleven Page 9 of 289

10 36. Inter-Location Dialing StarDialer for Outlook CAC (Call Accounting Codes) PAC (Personal Authorization Codes) Edition Eleven Page 10 of 289

11 Introduction To The Guide This guide is designed to help you get the most out of your Star2Star experience. It provides a detailed explanation for using your phone and the features on your Star2Star system. Please identify your phone type from the guide in section 1. Star2Star Supported Phones. There are subtle differences in operation for each phone model and manufacturer. Star2Star currently supports phones from five different manufacturers, Polycom, Grandstream, snom, Cisco, Yealink. The Softphone (S2S 3000) available for PCs and Macs is also supported. Analog phones can be supported via an adapter. All are referenced throughout this guide. Many of the phones listed use soft keys. A soft key is a button, located alongside a display device which changes during the operation of the phone. Phone features are grouped together by manufacturer type. There is also a section that covers Star2Star System Features i.e. those features that are not specific to a phone type. To easily navigate this document on-line, use the links provided in the Contents pages or click your phone (image) in section 1. Star2Star Supported Phones. Click on the phone model (highlighted link below image) to show a video presentation of the phone e.g. IP 650 Edition Eleven Page 11 of 289

12 1. Star2Star Supported Phones Use the following guide to identify your phone type. Your Star2Star system supports the following devices. This document will reference Polycom, Grandstream, Softphone, snom or Cisco. The Polycom phone model number can be found on the underside of the phone. The snom model number is to the top right side of the phone. The Cisco phone model number is located at top right side of the phone. Polycom Phone See (Note) IP 430 IP 501 IP 601 * IP 32x/33x IP 450 IP 550 IP 560 (GigE) IP 650 * IP 670 * (Color/GigE) * IP Key Expansion Module (Max 3) * IP Key Backlit Expansion Module (Max 3) * IP Key Color Backlit Expansion Module (Max 3) IP 4000 Conference Phone IP 6000 Conference Phone IP 5000 Conference Phone (Note) IP 32x / 33x includes IP 320, IP 321, IP 330, IP 331 and IP 335 Edition Eleven Page 12 of 289

13 1. Star2Star Supported Phones (contd) Grandstream Phone Softphone GXP2000 S2S 3000 (User provided PC Handset/Headset) snom Phone ** 42 Key Expansion Module (Max 3) snom 300 snom 320 ** snom 360 ** snom 370 ** snom m3 IP DECT (wireless) Cisco Phone Cisco SPA303 Cisco SPA501G *** Cisco SPA504G *** Cisco SPA508G *** Cisco SPA509G *** Cisco SPA525G2 *** Cisco SPA500S *** 32 Key Attendant Console (Max 2) Cisco IP Phone 7960 (SIP firmware 8.9) (Note) Phones not supplied by Star2Star Cisco IP Phone 7940 (SIP firmware 8.9) (Note) Phones not supplied by Star2Star Edition Eleven Page 13 of 289

14 Analog Phone Panasonic Phone (Note) Phones not supplied by Star2Star Panasonic KX-TGP500 Yealink Phone Yealink T20P Yealink T22P Yealink T26P Yealink T28P Yealink T32G Yealink T38G Expansion Module EXP38 Expansion Module EXP39 Edition Eleven Page 14 of 289

15 a). Answering a Call Using the Handset: 1. Pick up the handset. Using Hands-Free Speakerphone Mode: 2. Polycom Phones 1. Press, or with the handset on hook press the line key with the active indicator, or the soft key. Using the (optional) Headset: 1. Press to answer the call through an optionally connected headset. In all cases the active call will appear on the display showing call duration and destination. Handling multiple calls: 1. With a call in progress any subsequent calls are displayed by a change in the phones display screen. The user will also hear a short tone to indicate another call is present. Select the down arrow button then select the soft key as shown on the phones display. 2. Your original caller is automatically placed on hold. (Note) the Polycom phone can handle multiple calls per line appearance. 3. Alternatively you may press the hold key. The line key will flash and the phone will ring. Press the line key to answer the new call. 4. Once the phone reaches its multiple call limit the next caller will either hear Voic or follow the phones Find-Me / Follow-Me settings if configured. b). Making a Call Using the handset: 1. Pick up the handset and dial the desired number. If the number is less than 10 digits please press Send or Dial to complete the call. Using Hands Free Speaker Phone Mode: 1. With the handset on-hook, press any assigned line key,, or to obtain dial tone. Dial the desired number. 2. If the number is less than 10 digits please press Send or Dial to complete the call. Using the (optional) Headset: 1. With the headset connected, press any assigned line key,, or to obtain dial tone. Dial the desired number. 2. If the number is less than 10 digits please press Send or Dial to complete the call. 3. (Note) You also have the option to dial directly from the dial pad without first getting dial tone. Simply enter the number then lift the handset or use a headset, press the soft key, or press the or keys. In all cases, the active call will appear on the display showing call duration and destination. 2. Polycom Phones-Making a Call (contd) Edition Eleven Page 15 of 289

16 Redial Last Number: 1. To redial the last number dialed press the redial key. On models IP 32x/33x press the key to display the Placed Call List. Use the press again to dial the number. Up/Down arrow keys to search for the desired number. Then Call Lists: 1. To access a list of calls you have placed, received or missed press 2. Select Features followed by Call Lists. Information on respective calls will be displayed. Alternatively you may select the following arrow keys for fast access: Press for Speed Dials Press for Received Calls Press for Placed Calls Press for Missed Calls Outgoing CallerID: 1. Your phone can be configured to display the Outgoing CallerID of your main number (default setting) or any other number that is configured on your system. 2. The CallerID can also be set to Blocked. 3. System Administration access is required to change these settings. 4. A typical setup could be to display the main company CallerID on the first line appearance and another ID or Blocked for subsequent line appearances. 5. To use this feature, once configured, select the relevant line button to make your call (Note) The number of available line appearances is phone type dependant. 6. Your Outgoing CallerID will reflect what s set in the Star2Star Web Portal. c). Microphone Mute 1. During a call press the red indicator LED on the phone lights and a flashing microphone on the display indicates that the other party cannot hear you. 2. Press again to resume audio. Edition Eleven Page 16 of 289

17 2. Polycom Phones (contd) d). Holding a Call 1. During a call press or the soft key. The call will be placed on hold, the line key will flash red, Hold will be indicated on the display. The caller on hold will hear Music or Message on hold if enabled. 2. Press Hold again, the soft key, or the flashing line key to retrieve the call. If multiple calls are on hold on a single line key, use the and keys to select the desired call, then press the soft key to return to this call. If calls are on hold on more than one line key, the call details can be viewed by pressing and holding the desired line key. If a line key is pressed briefly, the first call on hold on that line key will be retrieved. e). Transferring a Call Blind Transfer (Transfer the call to another party without any announcement): 1. During a call, press the soft key. The caller on hold will hear Music or Message on hold if enabled on your system. 2. Press the soft key. Dial the number you want to transfer the call to then press the Send soft key to complete the transfer. Alternatively you may use the arrow keys to access speed dial numbers, missed, placed, and received call lists. Select a number from one of these lists then press the soft key to complete the transfer. Transfer may be cancelled during establishment by pressing the soft key. The original call is resumed. Transfer (Announced): 1. During a call, press the soft key. The caller on hold will hear Music or Message on hold if enabled on your system. Dial the number you want to transfer the call to then press the Send soft key to complete the transfer. Alternatively you may use the arrow keys to access speed dial numbers, missed, placed, and received call lists. Select a number from one of these lists then press the soft key. 2. When the called party answers, announce the call and press the soft key again or hang-up to transfer the call. f). Ending a Call 1. Press the soft key OR replace the handset, or press if in Hands-free Mode, or in Headset Mode. Edition Eleven Page 17 of 289

18 2. Polycom Phones (contd) g). Creating a 3 Party Conference Call 1. You can create a conference with two other parties using the phones local conferencing feature. 2. Place a call to the first party. 3. Press the Conf soft key to create a new call (the active call is placed on hold). 4. Dial the phone number of the second party or use the display control keys to access your contact directory, missed, received or placed call list. From one of these lists press the soft key. 5. When the second party answers, press the Conf soft key again to join all parties in the Conference or press the call. soft key to put the first call on hold and keep the second call as the active (Note) A conference can be created at any time between an active call either incoming or outgoing and a call which is on hold (on the same line or another line) by pressing the More soft key followed by the soft key. h). Volume Controls 1. Press the volume keys to adjust handset, headset and hands-free speaker volume during a call. 2. Pressing these keys in an idle state will adjust the ringer volume. 3. Your settings will be retained unless the phone is powered off. i). Missed Call Display 1. To view missed calls and clear the missed call display on your phone press the down arrow key. (Polycom IP 32x/33x users see note below) Press for Missed Calls 2. Press this key at any time to view missed calls. 3. Use the Up/Down arrow keys to navigate through the list of calls. 4. You may dial missed calls by pressing the Dial soft key in your phone display. 5. Pressing the Edit soft key in your phone display provides the ability to edit the missed number before dialing. 6. Pressing the More soft key in your phone display will provide further options i.e. Clear, Save, Info, More. 7. Pressing Clear will remove the missed call entry. 8. Pressing Save will temporarily save the missed call as a speed dial which may be retrieved (dialed) by pressing the Up arrow key. (Note) this will be lost if the phone is powered off. 9. Pressing Info will provide details of the missed call i.e. Date/Time. 10. (Note) When using a Polycom IP 32x/33x press the Callers soft key to view Received calls. Missed calls are stored as a Received Call. You may also access this list by pressing, Features and then selecting Call Lists. Use the Up/Down arrow keys to navigate through the list of calls. Edition Eleven Page 18 of 289

19 2. Polycom Phones (contd) j). Do Not Disturb 1. For Polycom IP 430/450/32x/33x press and select Features, and then select Do not disturb. Your phone will be prevented from ringing on incoming calls. Callers will be directed to your voic or Find-Me / Follow-Me if invoked. When the feature is enabled a Do not disturb icon will appear in the phone display. 2. To remove the Do not disturb feature press and select Features, and then select Do not disturb. 3. For Polycom IP 501/601/550/560/650/670 phones press the key to enable/disable the Do not disturb feature. 4. To remove the Do not disturb feature press again. k). Changing Ringtones 1. Press the key to enter the Main Menu. 2. Use the down arrow to select 3. Settings and press the Select soft key as indicated in the phone display. 3. Alternatively just press 3 to shortcut. 4. Select option 1. Basic. 5. Use the down arrow to select 3. Ring Type and press the Select soft key as indicated in the phone display. 6. Alternatively just press 3 to shortcut. 7. The Line Select menu is displayed. Depending on the type of phone in use a number of lines will be displayed. 8. All general calls to your phone will appear on Line1, unless your system administrator or Dealer has configured the system to use an alternative line number. 9. To change the ring tone for Line1 press the Select soft key as indicated in the phone display. 10. The Ring Type menu will be displayed. 11. Use the up/down arrows to browse through the available ring tones for your phone. 12. You will note a checkmark against the current ring tone in use. 13. Use the phone soft keys as indicated in the phone display to Play Exit Select 14. Pressing Play will play the ring tone. 15. Pressing Select will select that ring tone for use as indicated by the checkmark. 16. To access the Ring Tone menu rapidly by shortcuts press the key, followed by 313. Edition Eleven Page 19 of 289

20 2. Polycom Phones (contd) l). Voic Access 1. The red message waiting light indicator will flash to indicate that a new message is waiting. When you lift the handset Stuttering Dial Tone is played. The phone will also periodically send a discreet audible tone indicating that a new message is waiting. 2. To listen to voice messages press the key, dial 1000 or on an IP 320/330 phone press the Msgs soft key as indicated on the phone display if messages are present. 3. Press the Connect soft key indicated in the phones display to connect your phones mailbox. 4. The system will prompt for your password. (Note) as a new user accessing your mailbox for the first time, your password will be the same as your extension number. You will be guided through a short setup process including a password change. Set a password that is different to the extension number. See section Setting up your Voic . m). Speed Dials Description This option allows the user to add / manage individual speed dial numbers for their phone. Items that appear in the Destinations list can be selected. This option also provides the ability to add custom numbers and labels for easy identification i.e. those not in Applications as Dial External Numbers. The number of available speed dials will change if a user has an expansion key module associated with the phone. The number of modules can be set in Basic Settings under the P H O N E S Y S T E M C O N F I G U R A T I O N Menu. Select the Extensions link. The following phones sold by Star2Star Communications can be fitted with an Expansion Module/Attendant Console, sometimes also referred to as a Sidecar : Polycom IP 601, IP 650, IP 670 Snom 320, 360, 370 Grandstream GXP2000 Cisco SPA502G, SPA504G, SPA508G, SPA509G and the SPA525G2 Edition Eleven Page 20 of 289

21 Setup 2. Polycom Phones Speed Dials (contd) 1. Select the Speed Dials option under I N D I V I D U A L P H O N E S E T T I N G S to change the settings associated with the Speed Dial feature. (Note) not available on the snom 300 or m3. 2. Remember to Save Changes to PBX and reboot the phone. To reboot the phone unplug the internet cable momentarily. The phone will restart. (Note) if the phone has a separate power cable connected, momentarily unplug that cable to reboot the phone. Edition Eleven Page 21 of 289

22 2. Polycom Phones Speed Dials (contd) 3. The following examples show configuration of the Speed Dial feature for a Polycom phone. You may add multiple speed dial entries on a Polycom phone. Check this option if you wish to use the Polycom Buddy Watch / Presence feature. Select the up arrow on a Polycom phone for fast access to speed dial numbers. (Note) press the Dir soft key on a Polycom 32x / 33x. You may append the Company Directory to your speed dial list, including any other locations. Select the speed dial # using the drop down bar. Make your selection from the available options. As you complete an entry another available entry will appear on screen. 4. The following example shows configuration of the Speed Dial feature for a Polycom IP 601 or IP 650 with 1 Expansion module added. You can also add additional Speed Dials to the phone. A Polycom expansion module has 14 physical keys available. Up to 3 modules can be fitted to the IP 601/650/670 phones. All 42 keys can be programmed via the Speed Dials option if all 3 modules are fitted. You may add additional Speed Dials as required. These will appear on the phone and can be accessed via the Up arrow key (Note) press the Dir soft key on a Polycom 32x / 33x. Edition Eleven Page 22 of 289

23 2. Polycom Phones Speed Dials (contd) 5. To add a Custom Number and label for easy identification, select the Add Custom Number toward the bottom of the selection list. Add the number and associated label. (Note) this feature is available for the following phones; Polycom, Grandstream and snom (not 300 or m3). Select the Add Custom Number option. Enter the Custom number and Label. Edition Eleven Page 23 of 289

24 2. Polycom Phones (contd) n). Polycom Buddy Watch / Presence Feature Users can also set the Polycom Buddy Watch feature in the Speed Dial screen. Buddy Watch provides users with the ability to monitor the Presence of a number of local users. By setting this feature for a particular extension you can quickly determine the status i.e. busy or available. This feature works in conjunction with the Speed Dial / Directory list set on your phone i.e. use the Polycom Phones Speed Dial configuration examples to create your list. Check this option if you wish to use the Polycom Buddy Watch / Presence feature. o). Call Park 1. To park a call and retrieve from a different phone perform an attended (Announced) transfer to a. See section Transferring a Call 2. The system will play back a retrieval code ( ). a. The system provides up to 99 park positions 3. When the caller is Parked they will hear Message / Music on hold if enabled on your system. 4. To retrieve the call, dial the retrieval code to reconnect to the call. 5. If the call remains parked for longer than the system timeout (see On-Hold Options in the Portal Advanced Settings) the call will ring back on the originating extension. Edition Eleven Page 24 of 289

25 2. Polycom Phones (contd) p). Expansion Modules The following Star2Star Polycom phones can be fitted with an Expansion Module also sometimes known as a sidecar. Compatible Phones Expansion Module Unit Description Features Polycom IP 601 Polycom IP 650 Polycom IP 670 The unit is self powered and has 14 programmable buttons, LED s and display. Up to 3 units can be fitted to a single phone. Use the Star2Star web portal Speed Dial option to configure your expansion module. Commonly used numbers can be added either from the system Application-Dial External Numbers or custom numbers and labels. You can also add extensions and monitor the presence of a local extension. Generally you would monitor an extension on its Line 1 appearance. This is where all calls arrive by default. (Note) When monitoring extensions the lamp will only light when the extension is actually connected to a call or ringing with a new call. Edition Eleven Page 25 of 289

26 2. Polycom Phones (contd) q). Phone Options Polycom users can set additional phone options using the Star2Star web portal. 1. Select Phone Options under I N D I V I D U A L P H O N E S E T T I N G S to configure the following options: a. Enable Acoustic Echo Cancellation. See (Note) below. b. Disable Call Waiting Tone. The tone that is played to indicate the arrival of a new call when busy. c. Disable Message Waiting Tone. The periodic alert tone that plays to indicate that new voic messages are waiting. d. Disable Message Waiting Stutter Tone. The interrupted dial tone that is heard when new voic messages are waiting. e. Set the phone to auto answer. f. Holding Reminder Tone. The tone that is heard when you have calls held on your phone. (Note) Acoustic Echo Cancellation should only be used under instruction from the Star2Star Technical Support organization. Click here to change Phone Options Edition Eleven Page 26 of 289

27 3. Polycom IP 4000 and IP 6000 Conference Phones a). Answering a Call 1. Press or the Answer soft key. b). Making a Call 1. Press and dial the number or dial the number first, and then press. c). Microphone Mute 1. During a call press. 2. If you are using external microphones, you can also press on the microphones. You can hear all other parties while Mute is enabled. 3. To turn off Mute, press again. d). Holding a Call 1. During a call, press the Hold soft key. 2. Press the Resume soft key to resume the call. e). Transferring a Call Blind Transfer (Transfer the call to another party without any announcement): 1. During a call, press soft keys More then Trnsfer (the active call is placed on hold). The caller on hold will hear Music or Message on hold if enabled on your system. 2. Press the Blind soft key. 3. Place a call to the party you wish to transfer the call to, press the Send soft key to complete the call. Edition Eleven Page 27 of 289

28 3. Polycom IP 4000 and IP 6000 Conference Phones-Transferring a Call (contd) Transfer (Announced): 1. During a call, press soft keys More then Trnsfer (the active call is placed on hold). The caller on hold will hear Music or Message on hold if enabled on your system. 2. Place a call to the party you wish to transfer the call to, press the Send soft key. 3. After speaking with the second party, press soft keys More then Trnsfer to complete the transfer. (Note) Transfer can be cancelled by pressing the Cancel soft key. The original call is resumed. f). Ending a Call 1. Press or the EndCall soft key. g). Creating a 3 Party Conference 1. With a call in progress, press soft keys More then Confrnc to create a new call (the active call is placed on hold). 2. Place a call to the second party. 3. When the second party answers, press soft keys More then Confrnc again to join all parties in the conference. (Note) When a conference call has been established, pressing the Split soft key will split the conference into two calls on hold. Placing the call on hold on the conference originator s phone will place the other parties in the conference on hold. (Note) A conference can be created at any time between an active call either incoming or outgoing and a call which is on hold (on the same line or another line) by pressing the More soft key twice followed by the soft key. Ending the call on the conference originator s phone will allow the other parties to continue the conference. h). Volume controls 1. Press the volume keys to adjust the speaker volume during a call. 2. Pressing these keys in idle state adjust the ringer volume. i). Do Not Disturb 1. Press, Features, and then press to toggle Do Not Disturb on and off. A flashing icon and text on the display confirm that the feature is enabled. Edition Eleven Page 28 of 289

29 3. Polycom IP 4000 and IP 6000 Conference Phones (contd) j). Missed call display 1. To quickly view missed calls and clear the missed call display on your phone press the down arrow key. 2. Press this key at any time to view missed calls. 3. Use the Up/Down arrow keys to navigate through the list of calls. 4. You may dial missed calls by pressing the Dial soft key in your phone display. 5. Pressing the Edit soft key in your phone display provides the ability to edit the missed number before dialing. 6. Pressing the Info soft key to view detailed call information. 7. Pressing Clear will remove the missed call entry. 8. Pressing Save will temporarily save the missed call as a speed dial which may be retrieved (dialed) by pressing the Up arrow key. (Note) this will be lost if the phone is powered off. 9. Press to return to the idle display. 10. You may also access Missed, Received, or Placed calls by pressing followed by Features then Call Lists. k). Voic Access 1. The LED indicators on the front of the phone will flash red and stutter dial tone will sound to indicate that message(s) are in the phones mailbox. 2. To access Voic dial The system will prompt for your password. (Note) as a new user accessing your mailbox for the first time, your password will be the same as your extension number. You will be guided through a short setup process including a password change. Set a password that is different to the extension number. See section Setting up your Voic . See also Voic Guide. l). LED Indicators 1. The LEDs located on the top of the phone indicate the current status. a. Green Your call is in progress. b. Flashing green - There is an incoming call. c. Blinking green Your call is held by the other party. d. Red Your call is muted. e. Flashing red You have voice mail. f. Blinking red You have placed the call on hold. Edition Eleven Page 29 of 289

30 3. Polycom IP 4000 and IP 6000 Conference Phones (contd) m). Call Park 1. To park a call and retrieve from a different phone perform an attended (Announced) transfer to a. See section Transferring a Call 2. The system will play back a retrieval code ( ). a. The system provides up to 99 park positions 3. When the caller is Parked they will hear Message / Music on hold if enabled on your system. 4. To retrieve the call, dial the retrieval code to reconnect to the call. 5. If the call remains parked for longer than the system timeout (see On-Hold Options in the Portal Advanced Settings) the call will ring back on the originating extension. n). Phone Options See Section 2. Polycom Phones - q). Phone Options Edition Eleven Page 30 of 289

31 4. Polycom IP 5000 Conference Phone a). Answering a Call 1. Press or the Answer soft key. b). Making a Call 1. Press and dial the number or dial the number first, and then press. c). Microphone Mute 1. During a call press. 2. The console LEDs will glow red. 3. You can hear all other parties while Mute is enabled. The other parties cannot hear you. 4. To turn off Mute, press again. d). Holding a Call 1. During a call, press the Hold soft key. 2. The console LEDs will blink red. 3. Press the Resume soft key to resume the call. e). Transferring a Call Blind Transfer (Transfer the call to another party without any announcement): 1. During a call, press the Trnsfer soft key. 2. The active call is placed on hold. (The caller on hold will hear Music or Message on hold if enabled on your system.) 3. Press the Blind soft key. 4. Place a call to the party you wish to transfer the call to, press the Send soft key to complete the call. Edition Eleven Page 31 of 289

32 4. Polycom IP 5000 Conference Phone - (contd) Transfer (Announced): 1. During a call, press the Trnsfer soft key. 2. The active call is placed on hold. (The caller on hold will hear Music or Message on hold if enabled on your system). 3. Place a call to the party you wish to transfer the call to, press the Send soft key. 4. After speaking with the second party, press the Trnsfer soft key to complete the transfer. (Note) Transfer can be cancelled by pressing the Cancel soft key. The original call is resumed. f). Ending a Call 1. Press or the EndCall soft key. g). Creating a 3 Party Conference To create a three-way local conference call: 1. Call the first party. 2. After the first party answers, press the Confrnc soft key. The active call is placed on hold. 3. Enter the number of the second party, and then press the Send soft key. 4. When the second party answers, press the Confrnc soft key. All parties are now joined in the conference. You can do the following: To put the conference on hold, press the Hold soft key. To resume the conference, press the Resume soft key. To end the conference, press the End Call soft key. (The other parties will remain connected.) To end the conference and split the conference into two separate calls on hold, press the Split soft key. (Note) A conference can be created at any time between an active call either incoming or outgoing and a call which is on hold by pressing the More soft key followed by the Join soft key. h). Volume controls 1. Press the volume keys to adjust the speaker volume during a call. 2. Pressing these keys in an idle state adjust the ringer volume. i). Do Not Disturb 1. Press, Features, and then press the Select soft key to toggle Do Not Disturb on and off. A flashing icon and text on the display confirm that the feature is enabled. Edition Eleven Page 32 of 289

33 4. Polycom IP 5000 Conference Phone - (contd) j). Missed call display 1. To quickly view missed calls and clear the missed call display on your phone press the down arrow key. 2. Press this key at any time to view missed calls. 3. Use the Up/Down arrow keys to navigate through the list of calls. 4. You may dial missed calls by pressing the Dial soft key in your phone display. 5. Pressing the Edit soft key in your phone display provides the ability to edit the missed number before dialing. 6. Press the More soft key followed by the Info soft key to view detailed call information. 7. Press the More soft key followed by the Clear soft key will remove the missed call entry. 8. Pressing the More soft key followed by the Save soft key will temporarily save the missed call as a speed dial which may be retrieved (dialed) by pressing the Up arrow key. (Note) this will be lost if the phone is powered off. Use the Star2Star web portal Individual Phone Setting Speed Dials option to permanently store numbers for your phone. 9. Press to return to the idle display. 10. You may also access Missed, Received, or Placed calls by pressing followed by Features then Call Lists. k). Voic Access 1. A message envelope will appear in the top left portion of the phone display and stutter dial tone will sound to indicate that message(s) are in the phones mailbox. 2. Periodically a message waiting indicator tone will sound. 3. To access Voic dial The system will prompt for your password. (Note) as a new user accessing your mailbox for the first time, your password will be the same as your extension number. You will be guided through a short setup process including a password change. Set a password that is different to the extension number. See section Setting up your Voic . See also Voic Guide. l). LED Indicators 2. The LEDs located on the top of the phone indicate the current status. a. Green Your call is in progress. b. Flashing green - There is an incoming call. c. Blinking red You have placed the call on hold. d. Red Your call is muted. Edition Eleven Page 33 of 289

34 4. Polycom IP 5000 Conference Phone - (contd) m). Call Park 1. To park a call and retrieve from a different phone perform an attended (Announced) transfer to b. See section Transferring a Call 2. The system will play back a retrieval code ( ). b. The system provides up to 99 park positions 3. When the caller is Parked they will hear Message / Music on hold if enabled on your system. 4. To retrieve the call, dial the retrieval code to reconnect to the call. 5. If the call remains parked for longer than the system timeout (see On-Hold Options in the Portal Advanced Settings) the call will ring back on the originating extension. n). Phone Options See Section 2. Polycom Phones - q). Phone Options 5. Polycom Productivity Suite Software This software provides users with enhanced features on the Polycom Phone models listed below. For more details: 1. Access the Star2Star portal and select the CONFIGURATION option at the top of the page. 2. (Note) If you do not have a login please contact your System Administrator or Dealer. 3. Select the User Guides option under I N D I V I D U A L P H O N E S E T T I N G S 4. Click the Polycom Productivity Suite User Guide link to view / download. Recording Calls on the SoundPoint IP 650, 670 Playing Back Recorded Calls on the SoundPoint IP 650, 670 Managing Conference Calls on the SoundPoint IP 450, 550, 560, 650, 670 Edition Eleven Page 34 of 289

35 a). Answering a Call 6. Grandstream Phones Using the Handset: 1. Pick up the handset. Using Hands-Free Speakerphone Mode: 1. Press the SPEAKER key or LINE key. Using the (optional) Headset: 1. Press the SPEAKER key or LINE key to answer a call. Handling multiple calls: 1. Select a flashing red LINE key to answer an incoming call. 2. Subsequent calls (Flashing red LINE keys) can be answered by pressing the associated LINE key. 3. Your original caller is automatically placed on hold. (Note) the Grandstream phone can handle a total of 11 calls. 4. When all 4 LINE keys are in use subsequent incoming calls will appear on the 7 Speed dial keys. 5. Once all 11 are in progress caller #12 will either hear Voic or follow the phones Find-Me / Follow- Me settings if configured. b). Making a Call Using the handset: 1. Pick up the handset, LINE1 will light; dial the desired number and press SEND to complete the call. 2. Alternatively you may press any one of the four LINE keys to dial. Using Hands Free Speaker Phone Mode: 1. With the handset on-hook, press the SPEAKER key to obtain dial tone. Dial the desired number and then press SEND. 2. Alternatively you may press any one of the four LINE keys to dial. Using the (optional) Headset: 1. Press the SPEAKER key or LINE key, dial the desired number and press SEND to complete the call. Redial Last Number: 1. To redial the last number you dialed, pick up the handset, press the SPEAKER key or LINE key and then press Send. Edition Eleven Page 35 of 289

36 6. Grandstream Phones - (contd) Call Lists: 1. Press the OK button to display the Main Menu (See picture below). 2. Select Call History and then Received Calls/Missed Calls/Dialed Calls and select phone number. 3. Press OK to select and press OK again to dial. Press the OK / Menu button to display the Main Menu Outgoing CallerID: 1. Your phone can be configured to display the Outgoing CallerID of your main number (default setting) or any other number that is configured on your system. 2. The CallerID can also be set to Blocked. 3. System Administration access is required to change these settings. 4. A typical setup could be to display the main company CallerID on the first line appearance and another ID or Blocked for subsequent line appearances. 5. To use this feature, once configured, select the relevant line button (1 4) to make your call. 6. Your Outgoing CallerID will reflect what s set in the Star2Star Web Portal. c). Microphone Mute 1. During a call press the MUTE/DEL key. The word MUTE will appear in the phone display indicating that the other party cannot hear you. 2. Press the MUTE/DEL key again to resume audio. d). Holding a Call 1. During a call press the HOLD button. The call will be placed on hold, the LINE key will flash green, HOLD will be indicated on the display. The caller on hold will hear Music or Message on hold if enabled. 2. Press the flashing LINE key to resume. Edition Eleven Page 36 of 289

37 6. Grandstream Phones (contd) e). Transferring a Call Blind Transfer (Transfer the call to another party without any announcement): 1. During a call, press the TRNF key. The caller on hold will hear Music or Message on hold if enabled on your system. 2. The display will change displaying TRANSFER for the respective LINE#. The display will also show DIAL NUMBER (BLIND) OR SELECT LINE (ATTENDED). 3. Dial the number required and press SEND. Transfer (Announced): 1. During a call, press a different LINE key. The caller on hold will hear Music or Message on hold if enabled on your system and the LINE key will flash green. 2. Dial the number required and press SEND. 3. When the called party answers, announce the call and press the TRNF key (The display will change displaying TRANSFER for the respective LINE#. The display will also show DIAL NUMBER (BLIND) OR SELECT LINE (ATTENDED). 4. Press the flashing LINE key to complete the transfer. f). Ending a Call 1. Replace the handset or press SPEAKER if in handsfree mode or using a headset. g). Creating a 3 Party Conference Call 1. This is currently NOT a supported feature on this phone. h). Volume Controls Use the left / right arrow keys to change the volume setting Use the up / down arrow keys to browse 1. To set the ringer volume. 2. Press the OK / Menu button 3. Use the down arrow key to select Preference. 4. Press the OK / Menu button to select. 5. Use the down arrow key to select Ring Volume. 6. Press the OK / Menu button to select. 7. Use the left / right arrow keys to change the volume setting. 8. Press the OK / Menu button to select. 9. Press the left arrow key twice to return. 10. To adjust handset, headset and hands-free speaker volume during a call, press the up / down arrow keys during a call. Edition Eleven Page 37 of 289

38 6. Grandstream Phones (contd) i). Do Not Disturb Use the up / down arrow keys to navigate through options 1. Press the OK / Menu button. 2. Use the down arrow key to select Preference. 3. Press the OK / Menu button to select. 4. Use the down arrow key to select Do NOT Disturb. 5. Press the OK / Menu button to select. 6. Use the up / down arrow keys to Enable or Disable DND. 7. Press the OK / Menu button to select. 8. Press the left arrow key twice to return. 9. The icon will flash in the phone display when the feature is enabled. 10. Callers will be directed to your voic or Find-Me / Follow-Me if invoked. 11. Alternatively you may press the MUTE/DEL button to set the Do NOT Disturb feature. Press the MUTE/DEL button if you do not want to take a call. This will send the caller directly to voic or Find-Me / Follow-Me if invoked. j). Missed Call Display 1. To view missed calls and clear the missed call display on your phone press the Up arrow key. Press the OK / Menu button to display missed call details Press the Up arrow key to display missed calls 2. Press the OK button to display details about the missed call. 3. Use the Up/Down keys to navigate through the list of calls. 4. Use the OK button for a number to display further details. 5. Date and Time is displayed. 6. Select the Dial option to call the number. 7. Select the Remove option to delete from the missed call list. 8. (Note) the missed call feature can be disabled on this phone. Users that have been configured with Portal access can log in to the Star2Star Portal, select CONFIGURATION and change the settings associated with the Phone Options feature. If you do not have a login please contact your System Administrator or Dealer. 9. Select the Phone Options link to hide missed calls, turn on/off the backlight or print Speed Dial labels for your phone. Edition Eleven Page 38 of 289

39 6. Grandstream Phones (contd) Click the Phone Options link to show the missed calls display and backlight options. Use this option to hide the missed call display Use this option, available on a Grandstream phone, to enable the backlight k). Changing Ringtones Use the up / down arrow keys to browse 1. Press the OK / Menu button 2. Use the down arrow key to select Preference. 3. Press the OK / Menu button to select. 4. Use the down arrow key to select Ring Tone. 5. Press the OK / Menu button to select. 6. Use the up / down arrow keys to browse through the available ring tones. 7. Press the OK / Menu button to select. 8. Press the left arrow key twice to return. Edition Eleven Page 39 of 289

40 6. Grandstream Phones (contd) l). Voic Access 1. The red message waiting light indicator will flash to indicate that a new message is waiting. 2. To listen to voice messages press the MSG key or dial 1000 then press the SEND key. 3. The system will prompt for your password. a. (Note) as a new user accessing your mailbox for the first time, your password will be the same as your extension number. You will be guided through a short setup process including a password change. Set a password that is different to the extension number. See section Setting up your Voic . m). Phone Options Use your Star2Star Portal login, select CONFIGURATION to change the settings associated with the Phone Options feature. If you do not have a login please contact your System Administrator or Dealer. 1. Click Phone Options under I N D I V I D U A L P H O N E S E T T I N G S. This will allow you to Hide/Show missed calls and Enable/Disable the backlight on a Grandstream GXP2000 Phone only. 2. Remember to Save Changes to PBX when you have finished and reboot the phone. Use this option to hide the missed call display Use this option, available on a Grandstream phone, to enable the backlight Edition Eleven Page 40 of 289

41 6. Grandstream Phones (contd) n). Speed Dials Description This option allows the user to add / manage individual speed dial numbers for their phone. Items that appear in the Destinations list can be selected. This option also provides the ability to add custom numbers and labels for easy identification i.e. those not in Applications as Dial External Numbers. The number of available speed dials will change if a user has an expansion key module associated with the phone. The number of modules can be set in Basic Settings under the P H O N E S Y S T E M C O N F I G U R A T I O N Menu. Select the Extensions link. The following phones sold by Star2Star Communications can be fitted with an Expansion Module, sometimes also referred to as a Sidecar : Polycom IP 601, IP 650 Snom 320, 360, 370 Grandstream GXP2000 Cisco SPA502G, SPA504G, SPA508G, SPA509G and the SPA525G2 Setup 1. Select the Speed Dials option under I N D I V I D U A L P H O N E S E T T I N G S to change the settings associated with the Speed Dial feature. 2. Remember to Save Changes to PBX and reboot the phone. To reboot the phone unplug the internet cable momentarily. The phone will restart. (Note) if the phone has a separate power cable connected, momentarily unplug that cable to reboot the phone. Edition Eleven Page 41 of 289

42 6. Grandstream Phones Speed Dials (contd) 3. The following example shows configuration of the Speed Dial feature for a Grandstream GXP2000. Grandstream GXP2000 phone, has 7 physical speed dial buttons available to configure. Use this option, available on a Grandstream GXP2000 phone, to print speed dial labels. 4. The following example shows configuration of the Speed Dial feature for a Grandstream GXP2000 with 1 Expansion module added. (Note) the phone has 7 physical programmable keys already see example above. Grandstream GXP2000 expansion module has 56 physical keys available. Up to 2 modules can be fitted to the phone. This gives a total of 119 keys (includes 7 keys on the phone) that can be programmed via the Speed Dials option if both modules are fitted. Edition Eleven Page 42 of 289

43 6. Grandstream Phones Speed Dials (contd) 5. To add a Custom Number and label for easy identification, select the Add Custom Number toward the bottom of the selection list. Add the number and associated label. (Note) this feature is available for the following phones; Polycom, Grandstream and snom (not 300 or m3). Select the Add Custom Number option. Enter the Custom number and Label. Edition Eleven Page 43 of 289

44 6. Grandstream Phones (contd) o). Call Park 1. To park a call and retrieve from a different phone perform an attended (Announced) transfer to a. See section Transferring a Call 2. The system will play back a retrieval code ( ). a. The system provides up to 99 park positions 3. When the caller is Parked they will hear Message / Music on hold if enabled on your system. 4. To retrieve the call, dial the retrieval code to reconnect to the call. 5. If the call remains parked for longer than the system timeout (see On-Hold Options in the Portal Advanced Settings) the call will ring back on the originating extension. Edition Eleven Page 44 of 289

45 7. Polycom VVX500 Business Media Phone a). Phone Views The Polycom VVX 500 has four main views: Home, Calls, Active Call, and Lines view (the default). To change views: For Home view, press From Home view, press To switch between Lines view and either Calls or Active Call view, swipe the screen to the right or left. Home view: You may display Home view, as shown, by pressing. At the top, the status bar displays your phone s extension number and the time and date. If your phone has information you should know about, icons and/or messages will scroll, together with the date, under the time display. Home view shows three main icons: Edition Eleven Page 45 of 289

46 New Call: Tap New Call to display the Dialer. From the Dialer, you may enter a number or URL and place a call. From the Dialer, you may quickly access the Directory, Recent Calls and Favorites. Messages: Tap Messages to access your voic messages. Directories: Tap Directories to view all the contacts in your local Contact Directory. From your directory, you may add and search for contacts as well as quickly access the Dialer, Recent Calls and Favorites. If you press and hold the page indicator additional icons, press and hold. Home view expands to display additional icons as shown. To hide the Additional icons include: Settings: Tap Settings to access features and settings to customize your phone. Applications: Tap Applications to access a menu of custom applications. See your administrator for information about any specific applications listed in this menu. Calendar: If the Calendar feature is available on your phone, you may tap Calendar to view and join meetings. Note: You may also swipe the screen to see additional Home view icons. From Home view, tap the phone line to display your phone lines and favorites as shown. From this screen, tap a phone line to open the Dialer or tap a favorite to dial the favorite. To go back to the Home view icons, tap Close. Lines view: Lines view as shown is your phone s default display. Lines view displays all your phone lines, favorites and soft keys. Edition Eleven Page 46 of 289

47 If your phone is idle, you may: Tap a phone line to access the Dialer. Swipe to switch between Lines view and the Idle Browser (if available). If your phone has calls, the phone line indicates the number of calls you have and if they re active or held, as shown. If the phone line has an active call, a green bar displays. If the phone line has one or more held calls, a flashing red bar displays. Active Call view: If you have only one active call in progress, you may access Active Call view as shown. This view displays the name and number of the person you re talking with and the duration of the call. From Active Call view, you can manage the call: (hold, end or transfer) or set up a conference call with the person you re talking with and another party. Calls view: You may access Calls view if your phone has multiple calls in progress or you have one held call. Scroll to see all your calls. If your phone has multiple lines, calls display under the associated line. Edition Eleven Page 47 of 289

48 Call color indicates status: Dark green - Active call. Dark blue - Incoming and held calls. Bright green - Active call is highlighted. Bright blue - Incoming or held call is highlighted. Tap a call to highlight it. The soft keys apply to the highlighted call. Note: If you navigate away from your call(s), tap to see Active Call or Calls view again. b). Answering calls All incoming calls display in an Incoming Call window, as shown. To answer the call, pick up the handset, press or tap Answer to use the speakerphone or press. If you are already in handset, speakerphone or headset mode, tap Answer. If you don t answer the call within 10 seconds, the Incoming Call window disappears, and either Home or Calls view displays (depending if your phone last displayed Home or Lines view), as shown. Edition Eleven Page 48 of 289

49 To answer the call, pick up the handset, press or press. Or from Calls view, tap Answer to use the speakerphone. If you want to use the handset or headset, pick up the handset or press. Answering another call: If you don t answer the call within 10 seconds, the Incoming Call window disappears and either Home or Calls view displays as shown. To answer the call from Home view, tap and tap Answer., tap the incoming call to highlight it if you are in an active call To answer the call from Calls view, tap the call to highlight it if you re in an active call and tap Answer. Answering calls automatically: Your phone can automatically direct incoming calls to your speakerphone after a certain number of rings. Your system administrator sets how many times your phone rings before the call is auto-answered. You may choose to mute the phone s microphone when your phone automatically answers calls, so the caller won t immediately hear you. To unmute the call, press. Edition Eleven Page 49 of 289

50 If you enable Auto Answer and a call arrives while you re already in a call, the incoming call will be automatically answered if you end or hold the current call. 1. Tap Settings from Home view, and tap Basic > Preferences > Auto Answer. 2. From the Auto Answer screen, do the following: To enable your phone to automatically answer SIP calls, tap Auto Answer SIP Calls, and tap Yes. The default setting is No. To mute the microphone for all auto-answered calls so the incoming caller can t hear you, tap Microphone Mute, and tap Yes. The default setting is Yes. 3. Tap Save. c). Placing calls You may call using the handset, speakerphone or headset. You can dial the number first and then choose the method or choose the method first and then dial the number. You can place a call in the following ways: Manually, from the Dialer Automatically, by tapping a favorite in Home or Lines view Automatically, by tapping a favorite in your Favorites list, tapping a call in the Recent Calls list, or selecting a contact in your directory. Calling from the Dialer: The Dialer displays a list of previously placed calls. Tap one of the entries to automatically enter it or start entering a number. As you enter numbers, the Dialer displays a list of similar numbers as shown. Tap a match to automatically enter it. To display the Dialer, do one of the following: From Home view, tap New Call. From Lines or Calls view, tap New Call. This method only works if you don t have an active call. If your phone is idle, start entering a phone number. Pick up the handset, or press or. Edition Eleven Page 50 of 289

51 In Lines view, tap a phone line that doesn t have any calls. When you access the Dialer, an active call is held. To call from the Dialer: Pick up the handset, press or press. From the Dialer, enter the number and tap. From the Dialer, enter the number. Then pick up the handset, press or tap or press. If you re already in handset, speakerphone or headset mode, open the Dialer, enter the number and tap. Placing Calls from Favorites, Lists and Directories: In addition to the Dialer, you can place calls from the Recent Calls list, Favorites list, or your Directory. Or, you can quickly call a favorite from Home or Lines view. To call from the Recent Calls list: 1. Access your Recent Calls list by doing one of the following: From Home view, tap New Call. From the Dialer, tap Recent. If you only have held calls, you may also tap New Call from Lines and Calls view. From Lines, Calls, or Active Call view, tap. 2. From the Recent Calls list, tap the person you want to call. Calling from your Favorites list: 1. From Home view, tap New Call. 2. From the Dialer, tap Favorites. 3. From your Favorites list, tap the favorite you want to call. Calling from your Directory: 1. Access your directory by doing the following: From Home view, tap Directories. If a Corporate Directory is available on your phone, you will need to tap Directories from Home view and tap Contact Directory. From Home view, tap New Call and tap Directory. 2. From your Directory, tap the contact you want to call. 3. From the contact s information screen, tap the contact s phone number. Edition Eleven Page 51 of 289

52 Redialing Numbers: To dial the last number you called, open the Dialer. The first number in the list is the last call you placed. 1. From Home view, tap New Call. 2. From the Dialer, tap the first number in the list. Or instead of selecting the last call you placed, scroll through the list and select another previously placed call. 3. Place the call. d). Ending calls To quickly end an active call replace the handset or press or. From Active Call, Lines or Calls view, tap End Call. If you are in Calls view, be sure to highlight the call first. Ending held calls: You can t end a held call. From Calls view, tap the call to highlight it, tap Resume, and then tap End Call. You can end only active calls, not held calls, from Lines view. e). Headsets You can connect an analog and/or USB headset to your phone. If an analog headset is connected, green. If a USB headset is connected, glows blue. If both an analog and USB headset are connected, the USB headset will be used. If two USB headsets are connected, the headset you connected first will be used. glows If you use a headset, you may set up your phone so that all calls use your headset. If you use a headset that supports electronic hookswitch (EHS), you can press the hookswitch button to place, answer and end calls. In addition, you may be able to mute calls and control volume from your headset. Enabling Headset Memory Mode: You can set up your phone so that all incoming and outgoing calls use your headset. At any time, you can switch to handset or speakerphone mode. 1. Tap Settings from Home view, and tap Basic > Preferences > Headset > Headset Memory. 2. From the Headset Memory Mode screen, tap Enabled. 3. Press. 4. To activate Headset Memory Mode, press twice. Now, whenever you answer a call, the call will connect to your headset automatically. If you switch to the speakerphone or the handset, you deactivate Headset Memory Mode. Calls will no longer automatically go to your headset unless you choose this mode. To have calls go to your headset again, activate Headset Memory Mode by pressing twice. Edition Eleven Page 52 of 289

53 f). Responding to Incoming calls While your phone rings, you may do the following: Temporarily ignore the call before answering it. Reject the call so you can t answer it. Forward the call to another party. Ignoring Incoming Calls: Remove the Incoming Call window and display either Home or Calls view. Even though the call is ignored, Home, Lines and Calls view will still display the incoming call notification. Stop your phone from ringing. When you ignore or silence a call, you can still answer the call. From the Incoming Call window, tap Ignore (for private lines) or Silence (for shared lines). The Incoming Call window disappears, your phone stops ringing, and either Home or Calls view displays. Rejecting Incoming Calls: Reject a call to stop your phone from ringing and end the call so you can t answer it. Calls you reject display in your Recent Calls list. Rejecting calls is not available for shared lines. From the Incoming Call window, tap Reject. You may also reject an incoming call from Lines and Calls view. The call ends. g). Holding calls You may place any active call on hold. A held call displays in Home, Lines and Calls view as shown: From Active Call, Lines or Calls view, tap Hold. If you are in Calls view and the active call is not highlighted, be sure to tap it to select it. Resuming a held call: From Lines view, tap Resume. If there is more than one held call on the line, the last call you held will be resumed. If you have multiple lines and you tap Resume, the last call you held, on either line, will be resumed. Or From Calls view, tap the call to highlight it and tap Resume. Edition Eleven Page 53 of 289

54 h). Transferring Calls When you transfer a call to another party, you have the option to talk to the party before the transfer completes. If your phone supports a blind transfer, you can automatically transfer a call without talking to the other party. The call is automatically transferred after you dial the number of the party you are transferring the call to. 1. From Active Call, Lines, or Calls view, tap Transfer. The active call is held. 2. From the Dialer, place a call to the party you want to transfer the call to. 3. When you hear the ring-back sound, tap Transfer to complete the transfer. Or, if you want to talk with the person before the transfer completes, you can connect with the person, and then tap Transfer. To cancel the transfer before the call connects, tap Cancel. Blind Transfer: 1. From Active Call, Lines or Calls view, tap Transfer. The active call is held. 2. From the Dialer, tap Blind and place a call to the party you want to transfer the call to. If you don t see Blind, tap More (at the top of the screen) and tap Blind. If you are using a handset, complete the transfer by replacing the handset. The call automatically transfers to the specified party. i). Conference Calls 1. Call the first party. 2. From Active Call, Lines, or Calls view, tap Confrnc. The active call is held. 3. Using the Dialer, call the second party. 4. When the second party answers, tap Confrnc to join all parties in the conference as shown. Note: If your phone has an active call and one held call, either on the same or a different line, tap Join from either Lines or Calls view to automatically create a conference call. The conference call takes place on the line from which you handled the last active call. Holding and Resuming Conference Calls: From Active Call, Lines, or Calls view, tap Hold. If you are in Calls view, be sure to highlight the conference first. The other participants are held. The following example shows the held conference in Calls view. From Edition Eleven Page 54 of 289

55 Lines or Calls view, tap Resume. Ending Conference Calls: From Active Call, Lines, or Calls view, tap End Call. The conference call ends. By default, the other parties remain connected. Splitting Conference Calls: From Active Call, Lines, or Calls view, tap Split. The conference call ends. By default, the other parties remain connected. Managing Conference Call Participants: 1. Set up an active conference call. 2. From Active Call, Lines, or Calls view, tap Manage. If you are in Calls view, be sure to tap the conference call to highlight it. 3. Tap the participant you want to manage. 4. Do one of the following: Tap Far Mute to mute the selected participant. The muted participant can hear everyone, but no one can hear the muted participant. Tap Hold to hold the selected participant. The held party can t hear anyone, and no one can hear the held party. Tap Remove to remove the selected participant from the conference, end the conference call, and create an active call between you and the other participant. Tap Information to view additional information about the selected participant. Edition Eleven Page 55 of 289

56 Tap Back to exit the conference management function. j). Forwarding Calls 1. Tap Settings from Home view and tap Features > Forward. Or, from Lines view, tap Forward. 2. If your phone is set up with multiple lines, tap the line to apply forwarding to. 3. From the Forwarding Type Select screen, tap the forwarding type you want: Always: To forward all incoming calls. No Answer: To forward all unanswered incoming calls. Busy: To forward calls that arrive when you re already in a call. 4. Enter the forwarding number, and tap Enable. If you selected the No Answer option, you can enter the number of rings before your phone forwards the call. A value of 2 is recommended. If you chose the Always forwarding option, the forwarding number scrolls in the status bar. If a phone line is idle, Lines view displays the forwarding icon on the phone line, as shown. Disabling Call Forwarding: 1. Tap Settings from Home view, and tap Features > Forward. Or, from Lines view, tap Forward. 2. If your phone is set up with multiple lines, tap the line to disable forwarding for. 3. From the Forwarding Type Select screen, tap the forwarding type to disable, and tap Disable. Diverting Calls: 1. From Home view, tap Directories. If a Corporate Directory is available on your phone, tap Directories > Contact Directory. 2. From your directory, tap the contact whose calls you want to send to another party. 3. From the contact s information screen, tap. 4. From the Edit Contact screen, do the following: Tap Divert Contact, and enter the number of the party to whom you want to divert the call. Tap Auto Divert, and tap Enabled. Tap Save. Edition Eleven Page 56 of 289

57 k). Do Not Disturb When you enable Do Not Disturb (DND), you prevent your phone from ringing and send all incoming calls directly to voic . All calls you receive while DND is enabled will be logged to your Recent Calls list. 1. Tap Settings from Home view, and tap Features > Do Not Disturb. 2. Tap Enable or Disable. When you enable Do Not Disturb, My Status: Do Not Disturb and scroll in the status bar. In addition, displays on the phone line in Lines view, as shown l). Voic A message counter in Home view, as shown, indicates the number of new messages you have. Listening to Voic Messages: 1. On the status bar, tap, and tap Message Center. Or, from Home view, tap Messages and tap Message Center. 2. If multiple lines are configured on your phone, the Line Select screen displays. Tap the line that has the message. 3. From the Messages screen, tap Connect and follow the prompts. m). Recent Calls Your phone maintains lists of missed, received, and placed calls. Each list can hold up to 100 entries. The Recent Calls list displays calls as either: Missed Calls only, Placed Calls only, Received Calls only or All Calls (missed, placed and received). Edition Eleven Page 57 of 289

58 You may choose the type of list to display and sort and order calls as desired. By default, the list displays all calls as shown. From Home view, tap New Call and tap Recent. You may also be able to access Recent Calls by tapping Directories from Home view, and tapping Recent Calls. n). Contact Directory From Home view, tap Directories. If a Corporate Directory is on your phone, tap Contact Directory on the Directory screen or tap New Call from Home view, and tap Directory. From your Contact Directory, scroll to view contacts or enter search criteria to find one. Searching for a contact: 1. From your Contact Directory, tap Search. 2. From the Search screen, enter search criteria and tap Search. If you re using the onscreen keyboard, tap before you tap Search. A list of search results is displayed. Tap Return to display your Contact Directory again. Dialing a contact: 1. From your Contact Directory, tap the contact you want to call. 2. From the contact s information screen, tap the contact s phone number. Adding a contact: 1. From your Contact Directory, tap. 2. From the Add Contact screen, enter contact information: For First Name, enter the contact s first name. Edition Eleven Page 58 of 289

59 Tap Last Name, and enter the contact s last name. Tap Contact, and enter the contact s phone number. The phone number must be unique, and must not already exist in the directory. If you save an entry with a non-unique phone number, the entry won t be saved. Tap Job Title, and enter the contact s job title, such as Manager. Tap and enter the contact s address. Tap Favorite Index and enter a favorite index number. The number can be any unused value, up to a maximum value of A contact that has a favorite index number will automatically display in your Favorites list. Tap Label and enter a label for the contact such as, Marketing. If you specify a label, the label will be the first item that displays for the contact on the Directory screen and in your Favorites list if the contact is a favorite. Tap Ring Type and select the ringtone you want to use for the contact. Tap Divert Contact and enter the phone number of the third party you want this contact s calls sent to. Tap Auto Reject and enable or disable the setting. The default setting is Disabled. If enabled, each time the contact calls, the call will be directed to your mail system. Tap Auto Divert and enable or disable the setting. The default setting is Disabled. If enabled, each time the contact calls, the call will be directed to the third party you specified in the Divert Contact field. Tap Watch Buddy and enable or disable the setting. The default setting is Disabled. If enabled, you can monitor the contact s status. Tap Block Buddy and enable or disable the setting. The default setting is Disabled. If enabled, the contact can t monitor your status. 3. Tap Save. o). Recording Calls If the call recording feature is available and you connect a USB flash drive to the USB port on your phone, you can record active calls on your phone. Recordings are stored as.wav files on the USB flash drive. You can record up to four hours in one file. When you attach a USB flash drive to your phone, a USB icon, scrolls in the status bar together with a message that tells you how much recording time is available on the USB flash drive. You can t record when: There are no connected calls on your phone. You place a new call to transfer a call or set up a conference. The phone prompts you to answer an incoming call. If you hold a call, recording pauses. Recording continues if the called party places you on hold. Recording Edition Eleven Page 59 of 289

60 stops if all active calls end, no matter who ends the calls. If you press while recording, only the called parties are recorded. You control recording by tapping Start, Pause, Resume and Stop. All active calls that occur on your phone between the time you tap Start and Stop are recorded, alternating in the same.wav file. If you record, or attempt to record, a call, the following messages may appear on your screen: If there is insufficient free space on the USB flash drive when you tap Start, recording doesn t start and the message USB device is full/recording cancelled displays. If the USB flash drive becomes full during recording, recording stops and the message USB device is full/recording stopped displays. If you remove the USB flash drive during recording, recording stops and the message USB device removed unsafely/recording cancelled displays. If you attach an unsupported USB flash drive, the message Unsupported USB device attached displays along with information about the unsupported product. Recording a call: 1. From Lines, Calls, or Active Call view, tap Record. 2. To start recording, tap Start. The Recording icon scrolls in the status bar while the phone records, as shown. The message Recording in progress also scrolls in the status bar. While you record, you may stop or pause the recording. If you want to hold, end, transfer, or set up a conference call while you record, tap Back. 3. To stop recording, do one of the following: Tap Stop. Then tap Back if you want to manage the call, hold, end, transfer it or set up a conference. When you stop recording, the Stopped Recording icon displays in the status bar. To end the call, tap Back and tap End Call or hang up. Recording a conference call: You can record a conference call in the same way as other calls with the following exceptions: Edition Eleven Page 60 of 289

61 All conference call participants are recorded. If one of the conference participants presses not recorded., that participant is If you hold a conference call, recording pauses. You can place or answer other calls, which will be recorded in the same file. When you resume the conference call, recording resumes. Pause and Resume a recording: Tap Pause. To resume the recording, tap Resume. Recording continues within the same.wav file. p). Playing Recorded Calls If you connect a USB flash drive to your phone, you can play calls that you recorded on your phone. You can browse the recorded files, stored as.wav files, on the USB flash drive. You can also open, rename and delete the recorded files. If there are no supported.wav files on the USB flash drive, the message Unsupported.wav file format appears on the screen. Playing recorded calls occurs in real time. To adjust the volume of the recording while you play it, press one of the Volume keys,. Playing stops if you tap Exit, or press, or. If the handset is off-hook when you tap Play, you ll hear audio through the handset. If the handset is on-hook when you tap Play, you ll hear audio through the speaker. If you lift the handset while you listen through the speaker, you ll hear the audio through the handset. You can t open a.wav file if you have an active call or during recording. If you try, the message Action aborted displays. If all calls are held, you may start playing a recording. However, if you resume a call, playback will stop. You can play recorded files on other devices, such as a Windows or Apple based computer using an application capable of playing.wav files. If an error occurs while a recording plays, playing stops. If you re playing a file and an incoming call arrives, playing pauses and the phone rings. If you don t answer your phone, playback remains paused and you have to tap Resume to continue playing the recording. If you decide to reject the incoming call, tap Resume and playing will resume. Browsing recorded files: 1. Tap Settings from Home view, and tap Features > Removable Storage Media > Browse Recordings. A list of recordings displays, as shown. Edition Eleven Page 61 of 289

62 2. From the Browse Recordings screen, tap the recording you want to rename, delete or play. You can rename, delete or play the selected.wav file by tapping Rename, Delete, or Open (to play it). Playing recorded files: 1. Tap Settings from Home view, and tap Features > Removable Storage Media > Browse Recordings. 2. From the Browse Recordings screen, tap the file you want to play and tap Open. 3. Tap Play. Playing displays on the screen. The position indicator (in hours, minutes and seconds) above the progress bar changes as the file plays in real time as shown. While the recording plays, you can pause by tapping Pause. To resume playing, tap Resume. To stop playing and return to the Browse Recordings screen, tap Exit. q). Using the Browser Navigation icons enable you to view previous Web pages, refresh the current page, return to the Main Browser s Home page or go back to your phone s Home screen. Editing icons enable you to enter information in text boxes. To display the editing icons, tap a text box in the Main Browser. Edition Eleven Page 62 of 289

63 r). Push-to-Talk (PTT) The Group Paging feature enables you to make pages one-way audio announcements to users subscribed to a page group. The Push-to-Talk (PTT) feature is a collaborative tool that enables you to exchange broadcasts to users subscribed to a PTT channel, much like a walkie-talkie. Your system administrator can set up both features on your phone. Your system administrator can define up to 25 paging groups for Group Paging mode or Channels for PTT mode. Your system administrator may assign a label to each group or channel that easily identifies the phones in the group or channel, such as All, HR Dept, Shipping Staff, or Executives. Each group or channel will have one of the following priorities: Normal: By default, broadcasts sent to Groups/Channels 1 to 23 are considered Normal broadcasts. If two users begin a broadcast on the same group/channel at the same time, the phone with the lower serial number will continue to transmit while the other phone will enter the receiving state. By default, all phones are configured to receive broadcasts sent to Group/Channel 1. Priority: By default, broadcasts sent to Group/Channel 24 are considered Priority broadcasts. A Priority broadcast will interrupt Normal broadcasts or active calls. All phones receive Priority broadcasts unless Do Not Disturb is enabled. Phones play Priority broadcasts at the phone s current audio level. Emergency: By default, broadcasts sent to Group/Channel 25 are considered Emergency broadcasts. An Emergency broadcast will interrupt Normal broadcasts, Priority broadcasts, and active calls and plays out at near maximum volume even if Do Not Disturb is turned on. s). Calendar If your phone is configured to connect to the Microsoft Exchange Server, you can view and join meetings scheduled in your Microsoft Outlook application from your phone. If your phone is configured to connect to the Microsoft Exchange Server, and the Polycom Conferencing for Microsoft Outlook software feature is installed at your site, you can schedule meetings using Polycom Conferencing for Outlook. Your system administrator has assigned you login credentials (a domain, user name and password) so you may access the Calendar from your phone. To use the Calendar feature, the phone must have your correct Login Credentials. If you don t see the Calendar icon in Home view or you are not receiving meeting reminders, your phone may not be connected to the Microsoft Exchange Server. To re-connect to the server and use the Calendar feature again, tap Settings from Home view, and tap Features > Calendar. From the Calendar screen, tap Connect to the server. Edition Eleven Page 63 of 289

64 t). Using a Mouse and Keyboard with your phone You can use your computer s mouse and keyboard to enter information, select keys and navigate screens on your phone. You may also use a USB keyboard that you attach to your phone s USB port to perform the same tasks. You may have both keyboards (your computer keyboard and a USB keyboard) set up at the same time. Then, when you have to perform a phone task, you may choose the keyboard that is most convenient for you. Before you can use your mouse and keyboard with your phone, you need to make sure the Polycom Desktop Connector (PDC) application is installed and running on your computer. While the PDC application is running, you may move your mouse pointer back and forth between your computer and phone. 1. From the Start Menu, select Programs > Polycom > Polycom Desktop Connector. After a few seconds, the Polycom Desktop Connector icon displays on the Windows system tray and the message Allow remote control of device <MAC address of phone>? displays on the computer. This message displays only the first time the application is started. 2. Click OK. When your phone is configured correctly, the Polycom Desktop Connector icon updates to. When this icon displays, the application is enabled and connected to your phone, and you will be able to use your mouse and keyboard with your phone. If the icon does not change, contact your system administrator. Exiting the Polycom Desktop Connector: 1. Right-click the Polycom Desktop Connector icon on the Windows system tray, and select Exit. 2. The message Are you sure you want to stop Polycom Desktop Connector Server? displays. Click OK to confirm your action. The icon is removed from the system tray and the application is terminated. You won t be able to use your mouse and keyboard with your phone. When PDC is enabled, you may use your mouse and keyboard to navigate menus, make option selections and enter text and numeric values as an alternative to using your phone s keypad interface. For example, you can use your mouse and/or keyboard to select and copy text from your computer and paste it into the editable fields on your phone s screen. To display the mouse pointer on your phone s screen, drag the mouse pointer beyond the edge of your computer screen in the direction of your phone screen. When you see the mouse pointer on your phone screen, you can start selecting items and entering data. To enter information on your computer again, drag the mouse pointer back to your computer screen. PDC Capabilities: Use your keyboard to enter information on your phone screen. Use the keys in the number pad for dialing on the phone and the number keys above alphabetic characters for numerical text entry. Copy information from your computer screen and paste it onto your phone screen, using your keyboard s shortcuts to cut, copy and paste. You can t copy information from your phone screen and paste it onto your computer screen. Copy and paste information between fields on your phone screen by right-clicking the field and choosing a clipboard command such as Cut (Ctrl+X), Copy (Ctrl+C), and/or Paste (Ctrl+V). Edition Eleven Page 64 of 289

65 Use your mouse pointer to highlight information on the phone. Delete information on your phone by highlighting the information using your cursor and pressing the Delete or Backspace keys on your keyboard. Use the Home and End keys on your keyboard to position your cursor at the beginning or the end of fields on your phone. When entering numeric information such as phone numbers, you can enable the NUM LOCK function on your keyboard and use the numeric keypad interface as an alternative to using the keypad interface on the phone. Use the arrow keys to move within text fields. Hold Alt + Up/Down to adjust the volume level. Use the mouse scroll wheel to navigate through lists and menus. You may also use the function keys on your keyboard to save time. The function keys are mapped to features on your phone, as shown. Edition Eleven Page 65 of 289

66 Using a USB Keyboard with Your Phone: If you attach a USB keyboard to your phone, you can use the keyboard to enter information and navigate screens on your phone. For example, you can enter phone numbers, directory information and select screen items without using the phone s keypad or tapping the screen. You attach a USB keyboard to the USB port on the top of your phone. After you attach the USB keyboard, you can immediately use it with your phone. You use the USB keyboard the same way you would use your computer s keyboard with your phone. u). Logging into Phones If your system administrator has set up the User Login feature, you can view your personal phone settings from any phone in the organization. This means you can access your contact directory and speed dials as well as other phone settings, even as you temporarily change work areas. If you change any settings while you re logged in to a phone, the settings are saved and displayed the next time you log in to a phone. When you log out, your personal phone settings no longer display. You can log in to a phone by entering your user ID and password. Default passwords are preset at the factory to the numerals 123. Logging in and out of a phone: Depending if the User Login feature is enabled and required, you may or may not have to log in to the phone to use it. However, if you want to see your personal phone settings from the phone, you will have to log in otherwise, you will see the phone s default phone profile. While logged in, you will have full access to your personal phone settings and your directory. After you log out of the phone, you will no longer be able to view this information on the phone. After you use a phone, be certain to log out of the phone to prevent access to your personal settings. Edition Eleven Page 66 of 289

67 Logging in to a phone: 1. If the User Login screen is in view, go to step 2. If the User Login screen isn t in view, do one of the following: From Lines view, tap Log in. Or, tap Settings from Home view and tap Features > User Login > Log in. 2. From the User Login screen, enter your user ID and password, and tap Log in. Default passwords are preset at the factory to the numerals 123. However, your system administrator may have changed this for security reasons. If your login credentials are accepted, the phone updates to display your personal phone profile. If your credentials are not accepted, the message User login failed is displayed and the User Login screen displays again. Consult with your system administrator if you need to confirm your credentials. Logging out of a phone: 1. From Lines view, tap Log out. Or, tap Settings from Home view, and tap Features > User Login > Log out. The Logout screen displays with a confirmation message. 2. Tap Yes. Your personal profile is no longer accessible and the phone displays either the User Login screen for the next user login or the default phone profile for anonymous users. Placing a call to an authorized number from a phone in the logged-out state: 1. Tap New Call. 2. From the Place an Authorized Call screen, tap the number you want to call, and tap Dial. Changing your Password: 1. Log in to any phone on your network. 2. Tap Settings from Home view, and tap Features > User Login > Change User Login Password. 3. From the Change User Login Password screen, enter your old password, enter a new password and confirm it, and then tap Enter. Your password is changed. The next time you log in to a phone, you will need to enter this password. v). Locking/Unlocking the Phone 1. Tap Settings from Home view, and tap Basic > Lock Phone. 2. From the Lock Phone screen, select how you want incoming calls handled when your phone is locked. Allow ringing when locked: Select this option if you want your phone to ring when you have an incoming call. If you choose this option, you may answer a call by entering your password. DND when locked: Select this option if you don t want your phone to ring. You won t have the option to answer incoming calls. All incoming calls will go to your voic system (if enabled) and display in your Missed Calls list. Note that enabling this option on shared lines disables ringing only. You will still see a visual notification of the call and have the option to answer it. The default setting is Allow ringing when locked. Edition Eleven Page 67 of 289

68 3. Tap Lock. To unlock your phone: 1. Tap Unlock. 2. Enter your user password, and tap Enter. Calling an authorized number from a locked phone: 1. Tap New Call. From the Place an Authorized Call screen, tap the number you want to call, and tap Dial. Or, place a call to an authorized number by using the handset, headset or speakerphone. To answer a call on a locked phone: 1. From the Incoming Call window, tap Answer. 2. Enter your user password, and tap Enter. w). Customizing your Phone Changing the language: 1. Tap Settings from Home view, and tap Basic > Preferences > Language. 2. From the Language screen, tap the language you want. Changing Time and Date Display: 1. Tap Settings from Home view, and tap Basic > Preferences > Time & Date. From the Time & Date screen, do one of the following: To change the date format, tap Clock Date. To change the time format, tap Clock Time. To change the order of the time and date display, tap Clock Order. 2. From the Clock Date, Clock Time or Clock Order screen, tap the format you want. Enabling/Disabling the time and date display: 1. Tap Settings from Home view, and tap Basic > Preferences > Time & Date. 2. From the Time & Date screen, tap Enable or Disable to turn on or off the time and date display. Changing the Backlight Intensity/Timeout: Backlight Intensity: 1. Tap Settings from Home view, and tap Basic > Backlight Intensity. 2. From the Backlight Intensity screen, tap Backlight On Intensity. 3. From the Backlight On Intensity screen, tap the intensity you want and tap Back. The default is High. Edition Eleven Page 68 of 289

69 4. From the Backlight Intensity screen, tap Backlight Idle Intensity. 5. From the Backlight Idle Intensity screen, tap the intensity you want, and tap Back. The default is Low. 6. From the Backlight Intensity screen, tap Maximum Intensity. 7. From the Maximum Intensity screen, tap Up or Down to increase or decrease the maximum intensity the screen can display. Backlight Timeout: 1.Tap Settings from Home view, and tap Basic > Backlight Timeout. 2. From the Backlight Timeout screen, tap the number of seconds the phone will be idle before the backlight dims. The default is 40 seconds. Changing Background Picture: 1. Tap Settings from Home view and tap Basic > Preferences > Background. The Background screen displays. Depending how your system is set up, you may have to tap Settings from Home view, and tap Basic > Preferences > Background > Select Background. The Select Background screen will display instead. The following figure shows a sample background screen. Your screen will have the default option as well as other options that your administrator may have added to your phone. If you set an image on your USB flash drive as your background image, the image will display in the list as Local File. 2. Tap the background image you want. Screen Savers: 1. Place one or more pictures on a USB flash drive, either in the root directory or in a folder. The pictures must have the following file type and size: File type: BMP, JPEG, or PNG Maximum size: 9999 x 9999 pixels. 2. Attach the USB flash drive to your phone. The USB icon displays on the status bar. 3. Tap Settings from Home view and tap Basic > Preferences > Picture Frame. 4. From the Picture Frame screen, specify the folder in which you stored your images on the USB flash drive and the length of time you want each image to display: Tap Folder and enter the name of the folder in which you placed your images on the USB flash drive. If you didn t place the pictures in a folder, but placed them in the root directory instead, don t enter a folder name. Edition Eleven Page 69 of 289

70 Tap Time Per Image and enter the number of seconds you want each picture to display. You may enter a minimum of 3 seconds and a maximum of 300 seconds. The default is 5 seconds. Tap Save. If the message No pictures found displays after you tap Save, there are no pictures in the folder you specified, or in the root directory if you didn t enter a folder name. Go back and make sure the information you entered is correct. 5. Tap Settings from Home view, and tap Basic > Preferences > Screen Saver. 6. From the Screen Saver screen, do the following: Tap Screen Saver, and tap Enabled. Tap Wait Time and enter the number of minutes the phone should wait after no activity before displaying the screen saver. You can enter a minimum of 1 minute and a maximum of 9999 minutes. The default is 15 minutes. Tap Save. After the number of minutes you specified in the Wait Time field, your phone will display the screen saver. You may stop the screen saver at any time by touching the screen, but the screen saver will re-start if your phone is idle again. Disabling Screen Savers: 1. Tap Settings from Home view and tap Basic > Preferences > Screen Saver. 2. From the Screen Saver screen, tap Screen Saver and tap Disabled. 3. Tap Save. Setting up Picture Frame: Tap Settings from Home view and tap Features > Removable Storage Media > Picture Frame. Your pictures will display one-by-one, like a slide show. Six icons display beneath your pictures. Power-Saving Mode: Your phone is set up with a power-saving mode that turns off the touchscreen to conserve energy. Your phone enters power-saving mode after it has been idle for a certain period of time. You can configure the period of time that the phone is idle before the touchscreen turns off. You can configure different idle timeouts for office hours and off hours, such as evenings and weekends. Changing Office Hours: 1. Tap Settings from Home view and tap Basic > Power Saving > Office Hours > Start Hour. 2. From the Start Hour screen, tap the day of the week you want to update, enter your start time, and tap Save. Enter a start time using the 24-hour clock. You may enter a start time from 0 to 23. The default start time is From the Office Hours screen, tap Duration. 4. From the Duration screen, tap the day of the week you want to update, enter the number of hours you work, and tap Save. Enter a duration of 0 to 12 hours per day. The default duration is 10 hours per day (for Edition Eleven Page 70 of 289

71 Monday to Friday) and 0 hours per day (for Saturday and Sunday). Changing Timeouts: You can update the period of time the phone will be idle before the touchscreen turns off. You can specify different timeouts for office hours (Office Hours Idle Timeout) and non-office hours (Off Hours Idle Timeout). By default, the Office Hours Idle Timeout is much longer than the Off Hours Idle Timeout. You can also specify a separate timeout period that applies after you press a key or tap the screen. This is called the User Input Idle Timeout. You can choose to set a higher User Input Idle Timeout than the Office Hours and Off Hours Idle Timeouts so that when you re actively using the phone, power-saving mode won t initiate as often. 1. Tap Settings from Home view, and tap Basic > Power Saving > Timeouts. 2. Tap Office Hours Idle Timeout and enter the number of minutes the phone should wait, during office hours, before starting power-saving mode. Enter a number between 1 minute and 600 minutes. The default is 10 minutes. 3. Tap Off Hours Idle Timeout and enter the number of minutes the phone should wait, during off-hours, before starting power-saving mode. Enter a number between 1 minute and 10 minutes. The default is 1 minute. 4. Tap User Input Idle Timeout and enter the number of minutes the phone should wait after a key press or screen tap before starting power-saving mode. Enter a number between 1 minute and 10 minutes. The default is 10 minutes. 5. Tap Save. x). Administrative Tasks If your phone is unable to operate properly, you may have to investigate or troubleshoot issues. To solve issues, your administrator may ask you to restart your phone, update the phone s configuration, or test phone hardware. Investigating Phone Warnings: If your phone is unable to perform certain tasks, a warning icon will display in the status bar, as shown. The warning icon lets you know that your phone has one or more issues that you should know about. You may view details about the issues from the Warnings screen. Viewing a detailed list of phone issues: Tap Settings from Home view and tap Status > Diagnostics > Warnings. The Warnings screen displays, as shown, listing any phone issues. Edition Eleven Page 71 of 289

72 After you view the phone warnings, you can tap Clear Icon to remove the warning icon from the status bar. The warning will still display in the Warnings list until the phone issue is fixed. Each time your phone has a warning that you haven t viewed, the Warning icon displays. Restarting the Phone: Your system administrator may ask you to restart your phone if your phone malfunctions or to assist in troubleshooting. 1. Tap Settings from Home view and tap Basic > Restart Phone. The message Are you sure? displays. 2. If you still want to restart the phone, tap Yes. The restart process begins. The process ends when the default Home screen displays. Updating Phone Configuration: Your system administrator may ask you to update your phone configuration. You may be able to do this without restarting your phone. 1. Tap Settings from Home view and tap Basic > Update Configuration. The message Are you sure? displays. 2. To update the configuration, tap Yes. The configuration is updated. Your phone may restart, depending on the phone settings that have changed. Testing Phone Hardware: Your system administrator may ask you to access a diagnostics menu on your phone to test your phone hardware. You can test your phone s microphones, speaker, handset, third-party headset (if present), keypad mappings, touchscreen, and LEDs. See your system administrator for instructions on how to perform these tests. To test your phone hardware: 1. Tap Settings from Home view, and tap Status > Diagnostics > Test Hardware. 2. From the Test Hardware screen, tap one of the following: Audio Diagnostics, Key Pad Diagnostics, Display Diagnostics, Touch Screen Diagnostics, Brightness Diagnostics, LED Diagnostics. Edition Eleven Page 72 of 289

73 8. S2S 3000 Softphone a). Answering a Call 1. Click on the softphone or click answer on the call alert box. 2. Alternatively click the line number on the softphone. 3. Or press Enter (On the keyboard) if softphone is the active application. 4. You can ignore the call and send the caller directly to Voic or activate Find-Me / Follow-Me if configured by pressing. (Note) If the call is from a queue, pressing IGNORE will step the call on to the next Member in the queue. Handling multiple calls: 1. Select an illuminated (yellow) line key to answer an incoming call. 2. When answered the line key will show green. 3. A subsequent call (yellow line key) can be answered by pressing the associated line key. 4. Your original caller is automatically placed on hold (line key turns red) and will hear MOH Message/Music on Hold if configured on your system. (Note) the softphone can handle a total of 2 calls, 1 for each line key. 5. When both lines are busy caller #3 will either get Voic or follow the phones Find-Me / Follow-Me settings if configured. The softphone display will show missed call no lines available. 6. The missed call information is available by clicking on the icon in the softphone display. b). Making a Call Using a user supplied headset/handset: 1. Dial the number required by using the softphone keypad or your PC/Mac keyboard then click on the softphone. 2. As you start to enter the number the line key will turn green. 3. Alternatively you may select any line key to dial. When you hear dial tone dial the number then click on the softphone to complete the call. 4. As you start to enter a number, a suggestion for completing the entry may appear e.g. you enter 9 and the display shows this is showing a previously dialed number. Press Tab on your keyboard to accept the suggestion and <- Enter to dial or just continue typing a new number. 5. You may also Drag-and-Drop an entry from your Contacts list or paste a number directly into the softphone display to dial by using Ctrl + v see section Softphone Guide. 6. Alternatively select a Contact in your Contacts list and click right mouse to dial. a. (Note) You may import Contacts from another source i.e. Outlook or a supported file format. 7. If your Contacts list contains many entries use the field to filter the list. Edition Eleven Page 73 of 289

74 8. S2S 3000 Softphone Making a Call (contd) Using Hands Free Speaker Phone Mode (Uses PC/Mac Microphone and Speaker if available): 1. Click on the softphone. 2. When you hear dial tone dial the number then click on the softphone to complete the call. Redial Last Number: 1. To redial the last number you dialed click on the softphone. 2. Alternatively you may click twice. Call Lists: 1. To access a list of calls you have placed, received or missed click here to open the Calls & Contact Drawer. Click here to display the Calls & Contact Drawer Call Record: 1. Click at any time during a call. Click again to stop recording. Recordings are saved as.wav files. 2. To view/change the Recorded Calls Location, click at the top of the phone and then select Options. Display the pane. At the bottom of the pane note the Recorded Call Location. Enter the folder where you want the recording files to be saved. You may also open the folder to view/listen to recordings. 3. The S2S 3000 Softphone can be configured to automatically record all calls. Contact your system administrator or dealer for details. c). Microphone Mute 1. During a call click on the softphone dial pad to prevent the other party from hearing you. The icon and will appear on the call display. Edition Eleven Page 74 of 289

75 8. S2S 3000 Softphone (contd) d). Holding a Call 1. During a call click. The active call will be placed on hold; the Line key will change from green to red and will appear on the call display. The caller on hold will hear Music or Message on hold if enabled. 2. Click the Line key to resume. e). Transferring a Call Blind Transfer (Transfer the call to another party without any announcement): 1. During a call click on the dial pad. The line and XFER LED turn blue and appears on the call display. 2. Dial the number required then click either or press Enter on your keyboard to transfer the call. 3. will appear on the call display. Transfer (Announced): 1. During a call select an available line. The original call will automatically be put on hold and will hear Music or Message on hold if enabled on your system. 2. Dial the number required then click. 3. When the called party answers, announce the call. 4. When you are ready to transfer the call, click on the dial pad, will appear on the call display. 5. The line of the original call is now red and the line of the third party is blue. 6. Select the original line (red) to complete the transfer. 7. will appear on the call display. f). Ending a Call 1. Click on the call display, click in the call alert window if configured or right-click the icon in the System Tray and choose End Call. Edition Eleven Page 75 of 289

76 8. S2S 3000 Softphone (contd) g). Creating a 3 Party Conference Call You can create a conference with two other parties using the phones local conferencing feature. There are three ways to set up a conference call. 1. Manual Setup: AA (Auto Answer) off and AC (Auto Conference) off. 2. AA Off and AC On. 3. Conference Server Mode: AA on and AC on. Manual Setup AA off AC on: 1. With one active call on one of the lines, place the call on hold by either: a. Selecting another line and dialing a third party, or b. Clicking on an incoming call. 2. To conference in both lines, click. All lines will be part of the conference. 3. To suspend the conference, click again to place all other parties on hold. The other participants cannot speak to one another. 4. You can talk privately to one line by clicking the appropriate line. 5. To restart the conference, click again. Viewing information on calls: 1. Hover over any line that is in use to see the status of the call e.g. on hold or in conference and the name or number of the caller. Removing a Party during an Active Conference: 1. Suspend the conference by clicking. 2. Select the line of the participant who will be leaving the conference. 3. Click to remove the party from the conference call. 4. Click the remaining line key or take the line off hold to re establish the call with the remaining party. 5. A party can also leave the conference by simply hanging up. Removing all parties: 1. If the conference call is in progress (not on hold), you can hang up on all parties and end the conference by clicking. Edition Eleven Page 76 of 289

77 8. S2S 3000 Softphone Creating a 3 Party Conference Call (contd) AA Off and AC On: You can answer calls manually and the softphone adds each to the conference automatically. 1. Click on. 2. Manually answer the first call. There is no need to put the call on hold. 3. When the next call arrives, on another line, answer the call. As soon as you answer the call, a conference will be set up among the three parties. Conference Server Mode AA On and AC On: Softphone will auto answer and auto conference both lines together. 1. Click on and on. 2. When the first call arrives, the softphone will automatically answer. You can speak to this caller. 3. When the second call arrives it will be answered and added to the conference automatically. (Note) We recommend that you use the Star2Star conference room feature for conference calls involving more than 3 parties. h). Volume Controls 1. Use the microphone slider to adjust the volume of your voice for your listeners. 2. Use the speaker adjustment to adjust volume of the sound you are hearing. 3. Adjust your PC/Mac sound controls for handsfree and ringing volume. i). Do Not Disturb 1. Click on the dial pad. 2. will appear in the softphone display. 3. All incoming calls will be sent to voic or your Find-Me / Follow-Me settings if configured. 4. An incoming call will show as and the missed call icon will appear however no sound or connection is made. 5. Click on the missed call icon to view caller details. 6. You can still make outgoing calls with the DND feature activated. Edition Eleven Page 77 of 289

78 8. S2S 3000 Softphone (contd) j). Missed Call Display 1. If you have a missed call(s) the icon will be visible in the softphone display. Click on the icon to view the missed call detail. The icon is cleared from the display. Right-mouse on the missed number in the Missed Call list to either Call or Add to Contacts. k). Changing Ringtones 1. Click at the top of the softphone. Select Options. 2. Display the pane. You can import.wav files as different Ring Tones. 3. You may also set the softphone to automatically come to the front of other applications when you receive a call. 4. You may also set the softphone to display the Call Alert Box when a call arrives. 5. You can set this Alert Box to remain visible during a call. Edition Eleven Page 78 of 289

79 8. S2S 3000 Softphone (contd) l). Voic Access 1. The icon will appear on the softphone display when voic is present. You can listen to new messages by clicking on this icon. This icon is only present when you have new messages. 2. To access your mail box at other times dial The system will prompt for your password. (Note) as a new user accessing your mailbox for the first time, your password will be the same as your extension number. You will be guided through a short setup process including a password change. Set a password that is different to the extension number. See section Setting up your Voic . m). Speed Dials 1. You may import Contacts to dial from another source i.e. Outlook or a supported file format. 2. Alternatively you may either Add Contacts manually or click in the softphone display during an active call to add that caller to your Contacts. 3. Click right mouse on a Contact to dial. 4. If your Contacts list contains many entries use the field to filter the list. Right click on a Contact to Call / Edit / Delete Click here to display Contact options Click here to display the Calls & Contacts tab Edition Eleven Page 79 of 289

80 8. S2S 3000 Softphone (contd) n). Call Park 1. To park a call and retrieve from a different phone perform an attended (Announced) transfer to a. See section Transferring a Call 2. The system will play back a retrieval code ( ). a. The system provides up to 99 park positions 3. When the caller is Parked they will hear Message / Music on hold if enabled on your system. 4. To retrieve the call, dial the retrieval code to reconnect to the call. 5. If the call remains parked for longer than the system timeout (see On-Hold Options in the Portal Advanced Settings) the call will ring back on the originating extension. Edition Eleven Page 80 of 289

81 9. S2S 3000 Softphone Guide 1. Menu Minimize Hide Calls & Contact Drawer Transfer, Hold, Record, Auto Answer, Auto Conference, Do Not Disturb, Conference Open/Close Calls & Contact Drawer Dial Microphone Control Hang up 2. Speaker Control You have new Voic . Click this icon to access your voic messages Click this icon to add this caller to your Contacts list. Click here to send your incoming call directly to voic or activate Find-Me / Follow-Me if configured and activated for your extension. You have missed an incoming call. To clear the icon, click on the icon. Indicates you are talking Indicates mute is on (Note) If the call is from a queue, pressing IGNORE will step the call on to the next Member in the queue. Edition Eleven Page 81 of 289

82 9. S2S 3000 Softphone Guide (contd) 3. Hot Keys Function Keyboard Shortcut Select Line 1 F1 or Ctrl + 1 Select Line 2 F2 or Ctrl + 2 Clear Backspace Dial Enter Turn Auto-Answer on/off Ctrl + a Open Calls & Contacts drawer Ctrl + b Turn Do Not Disturb (DND) on/off Ctrl + d Turn Auto-Conference on/off Ctrl + f Hang up Esc Call Ignore Ctrl + i Mute Ctrl + m Hold Ctrl + o Exit Ctrl + q Redial Ctrl + r Transfer Ctrl + t Paste (Paste a number into the display to dial) Ctrl + v S2S 3000 Softphone Download / Transfer license to another PC The S2S 3000 softphone is licensed for use on one computer only. If you wish to transfer this license to another computer and download the softphone application to that PC, uninstall the application on the original PC first and then complete the following steps: 1. Login to the Star2Star portal, select the CONFIGURATION option. 2. If you do not have a login please contact your system administrator or dealer for help. 3. Select your softphone extension from the dropdown if you have more than one phone. 4. As an S2S 3000 softphone user you will see E X T E N S I O N S U M M A R Y information applicable to your phone adjacent to the I N D I V I D U A L P H O N E S E T T I N G S selection links. 5. Click on the Transfer my S2S 3000 to another computer link. ** Edition Eleven Page 82 of 289

83 S2S 3000 Softphone Download / Transfer license to another PC (contd) 6. You may now login to the Portal on the computer you wish to transfer the S2S 3000 Softphone license to. 7. Select the CONFIGURATION option 8. Click on the Download: S2S 3000 for Windows link below S2S 3000 Softphone Information This will install the Softphone application onto your computer. 9. When you start the S2S 3000 Softphone application for the first time you will be prompted for the Username and Password. Enter this information exactly as it is displayed in the Star2Star Portal under S2S 3000 Softphone Information. S2S 3000 Softphone - Audio Device Setup The S2S 3000 Softphone will automatically detect devices attached to your computer and chooses which ones to use for audio. If you wish to override the selection made automatically by the Softphone you change them on the Devices panel. See below. 1. To view/edit settings click 2. Select Options to display the Options pane. 3. Select the Devices option. Edition Eleven Page 83 of 289

84 S2S 3000 Softphone Audio Device Setup (contd) 4. Headset and Speakerphone options are displayed. 5. You can select from the available options on the drop down. In this example the Headset Speaker and Microphone device is set to use a Bluetooth wireless headset. The Speakerphone is set to use the computers microphone or plug-in and internal speaker. Incoming calls will alert through the computers speaker. 6. If you encounter problems with your selected audio device using the S2S 3000 softphone use the follow steps to diagnose the problem: a. With the softphone visible on screen select the record option. b. Speak into your selected microphone device. c. The microphone level lights should glow red and your voice will be recorded. d. If it does not go to Programs/Accessories/Entertainment/Sound Recorder to display the Microsoft basic sound recording application. Click on the red record button to start recording. e. Speak into your selected microphone device. Stop the recording and play back. f. If no sound is heard your selected device is not recognized by your computer. g. Try using an alternative device e.g. the computers microphone and speaker. Edition Eleven Page 84 of 289

85 a). Supplied accessories 10. Panasonic KX-TGP500 Phones Each Panasonic KX-TGP500 phone unit contains the following accessories: b). Setting up the base unit Note: When connecting the base unit of the KX-TGP500, use only the supplied Panasonic AC adaptor PQLV219 or PQLV219 (03). Edition Eleven Page 85 of 289

86 The base unit status indicator The handset locator button displays the status of the unit and network. [ALL] allows you to page all handsets. c). Setting up the handset Note: When connecting the handset charger, use only the supplied Panasonic AC adaptor PQLV291 or PQLV219 (03). Battery installation Note: Use ONLY Ni-MH batteries size AAA (R03) in the handset. Do NOT use Alkaline/Manganese/NiCd batteries. Be sure to confirm correct polarities when installing batteries into the handset. Edition Eleven Page 86 of 289

87 Battery charging Charge batteries for about 6 hours when first installing the unit. The handset screen will display Charging. When batteries are fully charged, the charge indicator will go off. Battery level indicator The handset screen will display icons indicating battery levels. You may expect Panasonic Ni-MH batteries to last up to 5 hours for continuous use talking time and up to 10 days when not in use (standby) before needing complete recharging. Edition Eleven Page 87 of 289

88 Note: It is normal for batteries not to reach full capacity at the initial charge. Maximum battery performance is reached after a few complete cycles of use (charge/discharge). Actual battery performance depends on a combination of how often the handset is in use and how often it is not in use (standby). Even after the handset is fully charged, the handset can be left on the charger without any ill effect on the batteries. The battery level may not be displayed correctly after you replace the batteries. In this case, place the handset on the charger and let it charge for at least 6 hours. d). Handset features Soft Keys: The handset features 2 soft keys and a joystick. By pressing a soft key, or by pressing the center of the joystick, you may select the feature shown directly above it on the display. Joystick: By pushing the joystick [ ], [ ], [<], or [>] repeatedly, you may scroll through (up, down, left, or right) various lists or items or adjust the receiver/ speaker volume (up or down) while talking. Temporarily switching the handset display mode You may select to display either a single item or multiple items on one screen at a time for the phonebook list, caller list and redial list. You may temporarily switch the handset display mode by pressing the right soft key when viewing the lists with: [MULTI]: Multiple items are shown on one screen at a time. [SINGLE]: An item is shown on one screen at a time. You may confirm the detailed information. Edition Eleven Page 88 of 289

89 e). Answering a Call Using the handset When a call is being received, the ringer indicator on the handset flashes rapidly. The last 4 digits of the line number on which the call is being received are displayed. 1. Lift the handset and press [CALL], {C}, or when the unit rings. You may also answer the call by pressing any dial key from [0] to [9] [*] or [#]. (Any key answer feature) 2. When you finish talking, press [OFF] or place the handset on the charger. Note: If the auto talk feature is turned off, you may select which line answers when more than one call is being received: [CALL] [ ]/[ ]: Select the desired line. à Press [CALL], or If is displayed during the call, other units may join the conversation. Contact your administrator for further information. f). Making a Call Using the handset 1. Lift the handset and dial the phone number. To correct a digit, press [CLEAR]. 2. Press [CALL] or The unit selects the default line configured by your administrator. You may also select the line manually as follows: [LINE] à [ ]/[ ]: Select the desired line. à [CALL] 3. When you are finished talking, press [OFF] or place the handset on the charger. Note: If is displayed during the call, other units may join the conversation. Contact your administrator for further information. A maximum of 3 lines can be used at a time. To use the optional headset, plug the headset into the headset jack before performing step 1. Using the speakerphone 1. Dial the phone number and press The unit selects the default line configured by your administrator. You may also select the line manually as follows: [LINE] à [ ]/[ ]: Select the desired line. à. Speak alternately with the other party. 2. When you finish talking, press [OFF]. Note: For best performance, use the speakerphone in a quiet environment. To switch back to the receiver, press Redial last number: The last 10 phone numbers dialed are stored in the redial list (each 32 digits max.). 1. [REDIAL] 2. [ ]/[ ]: Select the desired phone number. 3. / If is pressed and the other party s line is engaged, the unit automatically redials multiple times. While the handset is waiting to redial, the ringer indicator flashes. To cancel, press [OFF]. Edition Eleven Page 89 of 289

90 Editing, erasing, storing a number in redial list 1. [REDIAL] 2. [ ]/[ ]: Select the desired phone number. à [MENU] 3. Proceed with the desired operation. Editing a number before calling: [ ]/[ ]: Edit and Call à [SELECT] à Use the joystick to move the cursor. à Edit the number. à Press [CALL] or Erasing a number: [ ]/[ ]: Erase à [SELECT] à [ ]/[ ]: Yes à [SELECT] à [OFF] Storing a number to the phonebook: [ ]/[ ]: Save phonebook à [SELECT] à To store the name, continue from step 3. Note: When editing: To erase a number, place the cursor on the number, press [CLEAR]. To insert a number, place the cursor to the right of where you want to insert the number, press the appropriate dial key. g). Microphone Mute While mute is turned on, you may hear the other party, but the other party cannot hear you. 1. Press [MUTE] during an outside call. 2. To return to the conversation, press [MUTE] again. Note: [MUTE] is a soft key visible on the display during a call. h). Call Waiting This feature allows you to receive calls while you are already talking on the phone. If you receive a call while on the phone, the 2nd caller s information is displayed on the handset that is in use after you hear the interrupt tone. This feature depends on your phone system. Contact your administrator for further information. 1. Press [SWITCH] to answer the 2nd call. 2. To switch between, calls press [SWITCH]. i). Transferring a Call Outside calls may be transferred to an outside party 1. During an outside call, press [MENU]. 2. [ ]/[ ]: Transfer à [SELECT] 3. Dial the phone number. To correct the number, press [CANCEL] to clear the number and enter again. 4. Wait for the paged party to answer. If the paged party does not answer, press [CANCEL] 2 times to return to the outside call. 5. [TRANS] Note: In step 3, you may dial the phone number from the phonebook: à [ ]/[ ]: Select the desired entry. à [CALL] Edition Eleven Page 90 of 289

91 Calls may be transferred without speaking to the outside party 1. During an outside call, press [MENU]. 2. [ ]/[ ]: Blind transfer à [SELECT] 3. Dial the phone number. To correct the number, press [CANCEL] to clear the number and enter again. 4. [TRANS] The outside call rings at the other unit. Note: In step 3, you may dial the phone number from the phonebook: à [CALL] à [ ]/[ ]: Select the desired entry. j). Conference Calls Multiple people can establish a conference call. 1. During an outside call, press [MENU]. 2. [ ]/[ ]: Conference à [SELECT] 3. Dial the phone number. To correct the number, press [CANCEL] to clear the number and re-enter. 4. Wait for the paged party to answer. If the paged party does not answer, press [CANCEL] 2 times to return to the outside call. 5. [CONF] To add a new party to the conference, repeats steps 1-4. Note: In step 3, you may dial the phone number from the phonebook: à [CALL] à [ ]/[ ]: Select the desired entry. k). Call Share Joining a call You may join an existing outside call. Availability depends on your phone system. Contact your administrator for further information. Note: The line must be set to allow other units to join through the Web user interface Privacy Mode. is displayed on the unit currently in use when it is allowed to join the call. Contact your administrator for further information. 1. Press [LINE] when the other unit is on an outside call. 2. [ ]/[ ]: Select the desired line to join. à [SELECT] l). Phonebook The phonebook allows you to make calls without having to dial manually. You may add up to 100 names and phone numbers to the phonebook. Adding entries 1. [MENU] (center of joystick) 2. [ ]/[ ]: Phonebook à [SELECT] 3. [ADD] 4. Enter the party s name (16 characters maximum). à [OK] 5. Enter the party s phone number (32 digits max.). à [OK]. If you do not need to assign the ringer ID, go to step 8. Edition Eleven Page 91 of 289

92 Note: While entering characters, you may switch between uppercase and lowercase by pressing [*]. 6. [ ]/[ ]: Set Ringer ID à [SELECT] 7. [ ]/[ ]: Select the desired setting. à [OK] 8. [SAVE] To add other entries, repeat from step [OFF] Note: In step 3, you may also press [MENU]. à [ ]/[ ]: New entry à [SELECT]. If you select No Ringer ID (default), the unit uses the ringer tone previously selected when a call is received from that caller. Finding and calling a phonebook entry To scroll through all entries: 1. [MENU] (center of joystick) 2. [ ]/[ ]: Phonebook à [SELECT] 3. [ ]/[ ]: Select the desired entry. 4. You may also select the line manually as follows: [LINE] à [ ]/[ ]: Select the desired line. à Press [CALL] or Searching by first character (alphabetically) 1. [MENU] (center of joystick) 2. [ ]/[ ]: Phonebook à [SELECT] 3. Press the dial key ([0] [9], or [#]) corresponding to the character you are searching for. Press the same dial key repeatedly to display the first entry corresponding to each character located on that dial key. If there is no entry corresponding to the character you selected, the next entry is displayed. 4. [ ]/[ ]: Scroll through the phonebook if necessary. 5. You may also select the line manually as follows: [LINE] à [ ]/[ ]: Select the desired line. à Press [CALL] or Editing entries 1. Find the desired entry à [MENU] 2. [ ]/[ ]: Edit à [SELECT] 3. Proceed with the desired operation. To change the name or phone number: [ ]/[ ]: Select the name or phone number. à [SELECT] à Edit the information. à [OK] To change the ringer ID: [ ]/[ ]: Select the current ringer ID. à [SELECT] à [ ]/[ ]: Select the desired setting. à [OK]. To turn the ringer ID off, select No Ringer ID. 4. [SAVE] à [OFF] Edition Eleven Page 92 of 289

93 Erasing entries Erasing a single entry: 1. Find the desired entry. à [MENU] 2. [ ]/[ ]: Erase à [SELECT] 3. [ ]/[ ]: Yes à [SELECT] à [OFF] Erasing all entries: 1. [MENU] (center of joystick) 2. [ ]/[ ]: Phonebook à [SELECT] à [MENU] 3. [ ]/[ ]: Erase all items à [SELECT] 4. [ ]/[ ]: Yes à [SELECT] 5. [ ]/[ ]: Yes à [SELECT] à [OFF] Character table for entering names While entering characters, you may switch between uppercase and lowercase by pressing [*] Edition Eleven Page 93 of 289

94 Chain dial This feature allows you to dial phone numbers in the phonebook while you are on a call. This feature can be used to dial a number you have stored in the phonebook, without having to dial manually. 1. During an outside call, press [MENU] 2. [ ]/[ ]: Phonebook à [SELECT] 3. [ ]/[ ]: Select the desired entry. 4. Press [CALL] to dial the number. Speed Dial Assigning an entry in the phonebook to a speed dial key: Dial keys [1] to [9] can each be used as a speed dial key, allowing you to dial a number from the phonebook by simply pressing a dial key. 1. Find the desired entry. à [MENU] 2. [ ]/[ ]: Speed dial à [SELECT] 3. [ ]/[ ]: Select the desired dial key number. à [SELECT] If Overwrite? is displayed, the dial key you selected has a phone number already assigned to it. To overwrite with the currently selected phone number, go to step 4. To select another dial key, press [BACK], then repeat this step. 4. [ ]/[ ]: Yes à [SELECT] à [OFF] Note: Where a dial key is already being used for speed dialing, Q is displayed next to the dial key number. Making a call using a speed dial key 1. Press and hold the desired speed dial key ([1] [9]). You may view other speed dial assignments by pushing the joystick down or up. 2. You may also select the line manually as follows: [LINE]à [ ]/[ ]: Select the desired line. à Press [CALL] or Canceling a speed dial assignment 1. Press and hold the desired speed dial key ([1] [9]). à [ERASE] 2. [ ]/[ ]: Yes à [SELECT] à [OFF] m). Call Forwarding Incoming calls can be forwarded to another party. You can choose one of 3 modes: 1. Unconditional : All incoming calls are forwarded. 2. Busy : Incoming calls while the line is in use are forwarded. 3. No answer : Incoming calls after a certain number of rings are forwarded. The default setting of the number of ring count is 3. Edition Eleven Page 94 of 289

95 Note: We recommend setting the mode with your network administrator. If this feature is set on your unit, it may be overridden by your phone system settings. This feature is not available on shared lines. The call is logged in the caller list with after the call is forwarded. Turning call forwarding on/off 1. [MENU] (center of joystick) 2. [ ]/[ ]: IP service à [SELECT] 3. [ ]/[ ]: Call features à [SELECT] 4 [ ]/[ ]: Call forward à [SELECT] 5. Proceed with the desired operation. When 1 line is registered: Go to step 6. When 2 or more lines are registered: [ ]/[ ]: Select the desired line. à [SELECT] 6. [ ]/[ ]: Select the desired option. à [SELECT] 7. [ ]/[ ]: On/Off à [SELECT] 8. [ ]/[ ]: Select On or Off. à [SAVE] If you select Off, press [OFF] to exit. If the phone number forwarded to has been already set, press [OFF] to exit. To change the phone number, perform from step 7. Press [OFF] to exit. 9. Enter the phone number you want to forward calls to (24 digits max.). à [SAVE] If you have selected No answer, enter the number of rings before the unit forwards calls (0, 2-20 rings). à [SAVE] 10. [OFF] n). Changing the ring count You may change the number of rings before the call is forwarded if No answer is selected. 1. [MENU] (center of joystick) 2. [ ]/[ ]: IP service à [SELECT] 3. [ ]/[ ]: Call features à [SELECT] 4. [ ]/[ ]: Call forward à [SELECT] 5. Proceed with the desired operation. When 1 line is registered: Go to step 6. When 2 or more lines are registered: [ ]/[ ]: Select the desired line. à [SELECT] 6. [ ]/[ ]: No answer à [SELECT] 7. [ ]/[ ]: Ring count à [SELECT] 8. Enter the number of rings before the unit forwards calls (0, 2-20 rings). à [SAVE] à [OFF] Edition Eleven Page 95 of 289

96 o). Do not disturb This feature allows the unit to reject calls on selected lines. The default setting is Off. Note: We recommend setting up the Do Not Disturb feature with your administrator. If this feature is set on your unit, it may be overridden by your phone system settings. This feature is not available on shared lines. The call is logged in the caller list with after the call is rejected. 1. [MENU] (center of joystick) 2. [ ]/[ ]: IP service à [SELECT] 3. [ ]/[ ]: Call features à [SELECT] 4. [ ]/[ ]: Do not disturb à [SELECT] 5. Proceed with the desired operation. When 1 line is registered: Go to step 6. When 2 or more lines are registered: [ ]/[ ]: Select the desired line. à [SELECT] 6. [ ]/[ ]: Select On or Off à [SAVE] à [OFF] p). Block anonymous calls This feature allows the unit to reject calls when the unit receives a call without a phone number. The default setting is Off. Note: We recommend setting this feature with your administrator. This feature is not available on shared lines. The call is logged in the caller list with [MENU] (center of joystick) [ ]/[ ]: IP service à [SELECT] [ ]/[ ]: Call features à [SELECT] [ ]/[ ]: Block anonymous à [SELECT] Proceed with the desired operation. When 1 line is registered: Go to step 6. after the call is rejected. When 2 or more lines are registered: [ ]/[ ]: Select the desired line. à [SELECT] 6 [ ]/[ ]: Select On or Off. à [SAVE] à [OFF] Call block This feature allows the unit to reject calls from specified phone numbers that you do not want to answer. When a call is received, the unit does not ring while the caller is being identified. If the phone number matches an entry in the call block list, the unit rejects the call. Note: When the unit receives a call from a number that is stored in the call block list, the call is logged in the caller list with the icon after the call is rejected. Edition Eleven Page 96 of 289

97 Storing unwanted callers You can store up to 30 phone numbers in the call block list by using the caller list or by entering the numbers directly Note: You are advised to store the 10 digits (including an area code) for PSTN calls because if 7 digits are stored, all numbers that have the last 7 digits will be blocked. From the caller list: 1. [CID] (left soft key) 2. [ ]/[ ]: Select the entry to be blocked. à [MENU] 3. [ ]/[ ]: Save call block à [SELECT] 4. [ ]/[ ]: Yes à [SELECT] à [OFF] By entering phone numbers: 1. [MENU] (center of joystick) à [#][2][1][7] à [ADD] 2. Enter the phone number (24 digits max.). à [SAVE] To erase a digit, press [CLEAR] 3. [OFF] Viewing/Editing/Erasing call block numbers 1. [MENU] (center of joystick) à [#][2][1][7] 2. [ ]/[ ]: Select the desired entry. To exit, press [OFF]. 3. Proceed with the desired operation. Editing a number: [MENU] à [ ]/[ ]: Edit à [SELECT] à Edit the phone number. à [SAVE] à [OFF] Erasing a number: [MENU] à [ ]/[ ]: Erase à [SELECT] à [ ]/[ ]: Yes à [SELECT] à [OFF] Note: When editing, press the desired dial key to add, [CLEAR] to erase. q). Changing the handset name Each handset may be given a customized name ( Bob, Warehouse, etc.). This is useful when you make intercom calls between handsets. You may also select whether or not the handset name is displayed in standby mode. The default setting is Off. If you select On without entering any handset name, Handset 1 to Handset 6 is displayed. 1. [MENU] (center of joystick) à [#][1][0][4] 2. Enter the desired name (10 characters max). If not required, go to step [OK] 4. [ ]/[ ]: On à [SAVE] à [OFF] r). Setting Date and Time Set if the unit does not show the date and time. You can set the date and time through the Web user interface and also program it to adjust automatically using the Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTP). Also daylight saving time setting is available through the Web user interface. Contact your administrator for further information. Edition Eleven Page 97 of 289

98 1. [MENU] (center of joystick) à [#][1][0][1] 2. Enter the current month, date, and year. Example: March 15, 2010 [0][3][1][5] [1][0] 3. Enter the current hour and minute (12-hour clock format). Example: 9:30 [0][9][3][0] 4. [AM/PM]: Select AM or PM. 5. [SAVE] à [OFF] Note: When English is selected as the display language, 12-hour clock format is used. When Spanish is selected, 24-hour clock format is used. To correct a digit, push the joystick left, right, up, or down to move the cursor to the digit, then make the correction. s). Updating the base unit software Your phone system dealer may offer new features and improve its software version from time to time. If you set the base unit software update setting to manual mode through the Web user interface, you need to download the update when Update version. Press OK. is displayed. Contact your administrator for further information. Note: Make sure the STATUS indicator on the base unit is lit in green and no line is in use. 1. Press while Update version. Press OK. is displayed. The current and new base unit software versions are displayed. If you want to download the update later, press [CANCEL]. When you are ready to download, see Confirming the base unit software version. 2. [OK] Note: The STATUS indicator on the base unit flashes while downloading. When the download is complete, the STATUS indicator stops flashing and changes to steady green. Confirming the base unit software version 1. [MENU] (center of joystick) à [#][1][5][6] The current base unit software version is displayed. To exit, press [OFF]. 2. If Update version? is displayed, press [OK] to download. To exit without downloading, press [CANCEL]. t). Registering a handset to the base unit Additional handsets Up to 3 handsets can be registered to the base unit. Registering a handset to the base unit The supplied handset and base unit are pre- registered. If for some reason the handset is not registered to the base unit (for example, I is displayed even when the handset is near the base unit), re-register the handset. 1. Handset: [MENU] (center of joystick) à [#][1][3][0] 2. Base unit: Press and hold [ALL] for about 4 seconds until the STATUS indicator flashes in red. If all registered handsets start ringing, press the same button to stop. Then repeat from step 1. The next step must be completed within 90 seconds. 3. Handset: Press, then wait until a long beep sounds. Edition Eleven Page 98 of 289

99 When the handset has been registered successfully, will change to. Note: When you purchase an additional handset, refer to the additional handset s installation manual for registration. Deregistering a handset A handset may cancel its own registration (or the registration of another handset) that is stored to the base unit. This allows the handset to end its wireless connection with the system. 1. [MENU] (center of joystick) à [#][1][3][1] 2. [3][3][5] à [OK] 3. [ ]/[ ]: Select the desired unit. à [SELECT] 4. [ ]/[ ]: Yes à [SELECT] When you cancel a different handset than the one you are now using, press [OFF] to exit. u). Using Caller ID Availability of this service depends on your phone system. Contact your administrator for further information. Caller ID features When an outside call is received, the caller s information is displayed. Information for the last 100 callers is logged in the caller list from the most recent call to the oldest. If the call is received as an anonymous call, Anonymous call is displayed. Missed calls If a call is not answered, the unit treats it as a missed call and Missed call is displayed. You may then view the caller list to see who called while you were away. Phonebook name display When caller information is received and it matches a phone number stored in the phonebook, the stored name in the phonebook is displayed and logged in the caller list. Ringer ID This feature may help you identify who is calling by using different ringers for different callers stored in the phonebook. You may assign a different ringer to each phonebook entry. When a call is received from a caller stored in the phonebook, the assigned ringer rings after the caller information is displayed. Caller list 1. [CID] (left soft key) 2. Push the joystick down to search from the most recent call or push the joystick up to search from the oldest call. You may see detailed information about the caller by pressing [SINGLE]. 3. To call back, press.to exit, press [OFF]. Editing a caller s phone number before calling back 1. [CID] (left soft key) 2. [ ]/[ ]: Select the desired entry. You can see the detailed information about the caller by pressing [SINGLE]. Edition Eleven Page 99 of 289

100 3. [MENU] 4. [ ]/[ ]: Edit and Call à [SELECT] 5. Edit the number. Press dial key ([0] [9]) to add, [CLEAR] to delete. 6. Press [CALL] or Erasing selected caller information 1. [CID] (left soft key) 2. [ ]/[ ]: Select the desired entry. à [MENU] 3. [ ]/[ ]: Erase à [SELECT] 4. [ ]/[ ]: Yes à [SELECT] à [OFF] Erasing all caller information 1. [CID] (left soft key) à [ERASE] 2. [ ]/[ ]: Yes à [SELECT] v). Voic The unit lets you know that you have new voice mail messages in the following ways: New Voice Mail is displayed if message indication service is available. The message indicator on the handset flashes slowly if the message alert feature is turned on. Message alert You may select whether or not the message indicator on the handset flashes slowly when new voice mail messages are recorded. The default setting is Off. 1. [MENU] (center of joystick) à [#][3][4][0] 2. [ ]/[ ]: Select the desired setting. à [SAVE] à [OFF] Note: While the message alert is on, battery-operating time is shortened. Listening to voic messages 1. [MENU] (center of joystick) 2. [ ]/[ ]: New Voice Mail [SELECT] 3. [ ]/[ ]: Select the desired line. à [SELECT] is displayed next to the line if there are new messages. If an arrow (>) is displayed after the number, the whole phone number is not shown. Push the joystick right to see the remaining numbers. To return to the previous display, push the joystick left. 4. When finished, press [OFF]. w). Intercom Intercom calls may be made between handsets. If you receive an outside call while talking on the intercom, you will hear interrupt tones. To answer the call, press [OFF], then press. When paging the handset, the paged handset beeps for 1 minute. Edition Eleven Page 100 of 289

101 Making an intercom call 1. [MENU] (center of joystick) à [ ]/[ ]: Intercom à [SELECT] 2. [ ]/[ ]: Select the desired unit. à [CALL]. To stop paging, press [OFF]. 3. When you finish talking, press [OFF]. Answering an intercom call 1. Press to answer the page. 2. When you finish talking, press [OFF]. Auto intercom Off (Default): Turns this feature off. On (Ringer On) : When an intercom call is received, the handset rings 2 times then the speakerphone is automatically turned on. On (Ringer Off) : When an intercom call is received, the handset does not ring and the speakerphone is automatically turned on. This allows you to easily monitor a baby s room, for example, from different areas of the house. 1. [MENU] (center of joystick) à [#][2][7][3] 2. [ ]/[ ]: Select the desired setting. 3. [SAVE] à [OFF] Note: Auto intercom cannot be used when your handset is receiving a transferred outside call or all handsets are being paged by the base unit. Answering an intercom call using auto intercom 1. When you are paged by another handset, speak into the microphone. To switch to the receiver, press. 2. To end the intercom, press [OFF]. Monitoring audio in a room You may listen to the sound in a room where another handset is located. Note: Before using this feature, set auto intercom on the destination handset to On (Ringer Off) to allow access by other handsets. 1. Call the destination handset. You may listen to the audio. 2. To mute your sound output, press [MUTE] if necessary. 3. Press [OFF] to stop monitoring. Transferring calls Outside calls can be transferred between 2 handsets. 1. During an outside call, press [MENU]. 2. [ ]/[ ]: Intercom à [SELECT] 3. [ ]/[ ]: Select the desired handset. à [CALL] 4. Wait for the paged party to answer. If the paged party does not answer, press t to return to the outside call. 5. [OFF] Edition Eleven Page 101 of 289

102 x). Belt Clip The TGP500 handset may be equipped with a belt clip. Attach as shown. y). Wall mounting charger The TGP500 charger unit is designed to be moveable and placed on any flat surface or mounted to a wall as shown. 1. Drive the screws (not supplied) into the wall. 2. Mount the charger, then slide it down and to the right until it is secure. Edition Eleven Page 102 of 289

103 Note: Make sure the wall is strong enough to support the weight of the unit. z). Base unit mounting The TGP500 base unit is designed to be moveable and placed on a flat surface or may be mounted to a wall as shown. 1. Remove the base unit stand by pushing and sliding down.. 2. Mount the base unit by inserting the screws (not supplied) into the round openings on the unit, then slide the unit down to secure it. Panasonic TGP500 phone (continued) Note: Make sure the wall is strong enough to support the weight of the unit. Attaching the base unit stand Attach the base unit stand by fitting the tab into the slot on the base unit. Slide the stand until it clicks. Edition Eleven Page 103 of 289

104 a). Home Screen 11. Spectralink 8400 Series Wireless Telephone The Home screen provides you with information about the status of the handset and the Home icons. Home Icons: The Home icons allow you to access your handset s features from the Home screen. Use the and keys to rotate the Home icons. Press the OK key to select the center icon. Contacts/Call Lists: The Contacts/Call Lists icon gives you access to your Contact Directory and your Corporate Directory, if available. Messages: The Messages icon gives you access to Voic and Instant Messages. Settings: The Settings icon opens a menu for configuring many handset features. Applications: Depending on the configuration of your handset, a menu of custom applications may be accessible by selecting the Applications icon from the Home screen. See your system administrator for information about any applications listed on this menu. Shortcut Menus: The soft keys at the bottom of the display allow you to select functions. The gray triangles in the upper right corner of the soft keys indicate that there is a shortcut menu with additional options. Use the shortcut menus to quickly find the options you want. Use the and navigation keys to highlight an option, and choose the option by pressing OK. Alternatively, you can press the number of the option on the keypad to instantly activate it. Grayed options are not available. Edition Eleven Page 104 of 289

105 b). Session Manager Use your handset to manage up to 8 communication sessions (calls, broadcasts, chats and alerts) at any one time and in any combination. Each communication session is shown as a color-coded cell in the Session Manager screen. Cells display with a call icon indicating call status, a line number indicator, the name and extension/channel of the party and the call duration as shown: Edition Eleven Page 105 of 289

106 Status and Call Icons: c). Answering a Call Press the Start key buttons).. If Multi Key Answer is enabled, press any keypad key (except soft keys and side Answering a call using Multi Key Answer: If Multi Key Answer is enabled, you can press any keypad key (0-9, *, #) to answer an incoming call. Enable (or disable) Multi Key Answer by navigating to Settings > Basic Settings > Preferences > Multi Key Answer. Answering a call when in an active call: 1. While in an active call, press the Ignore soft key to open the Session Manager. Edition Eleven Page 106 of 289

107 2. Press the Hold soft key to place the current call on hold and highlight the incoming call cell. 3. Press Start to answer the incoming call. Answering a call by ending the current call: 1. While in an active call, press the Ignore soft key to open the Session Manager. 2. Press End to end the current call. 3. Press the Start key to answer the incoming call. Ending an active call: Press End to end or hang up an active call. Rejecting an incoming call: Press End. The ended call will be sent to voic if set up in your facility. You can also forward calls to another number. To set up automatic call forwarding, see Forwarding Calls. Silencing Call Alert: Press the Ignore soft key to silence the ring. The call will display in the Session Manager until it stops ringing. You can have unanswered calls automatically forwarded to voic . Sending an incoming call immediately to voic Press End. If voic is set up in your facility, the ended call will be sent immediately to voic . See Accessing Voic . Forwarding an incoming call to another number: Press the Forward soft key. You can have incoming calls automatically forwarded to voic . d). Making a Call Enter a Number: Entering numbers using the handset keypad is the default dialing mode. Pressing any number on the keypad opens the Dialer, which will automatically display similar numbers from your Contact Directory for you to select. As you enter additional numbers, the list is filtered. You can choose a contact from the list or continue to enter the number. Press the Start key to make the call. Edition Eleven Page 107 of 289

108 Enter a Name: To place a call to an existing directory contact by entering the name, press the Start key to open the Dialer. Select the Entry Mode soft key and select the Name option. As you enter the letters of the first or last name, the list of contacts shown is filtered. Highlight the name and press the Start key. Call a Contact: Navigate to Contacts/Call Lists > Contact Directory. Contacts are sorted alphabetically. Scroll to highlight or use the Search soft key. Press the Start key to dial the number. Use Speed Dial: Press the Favorites soft key from the Home screen to display the shortcut menu of Favorites (contacts with speed dial numbers 1-10). Dial any contact by pressing the corresponding speed dial index number(s) on the keypad. Index numbers are assigned when a contact is entered. Call by using SIP address: Press any number key on the keypad to open the Dialer. Note: Phone numbers and URL addresses are limited to number characters. The Dial mode soft key displays. Press the Dial mode soft key, select URL and press OK. The Dialer displays an Enter URL field with the prefix sip: Enter the SIP address you want to dial and press Enter. Making an Emergency Call: If programmed in your facility, you may make an emergency call by pressing the Features soft key and then pressing the Speed Dial option and selecting the emergency number from the list. Note: To abort an outgoing call while it is ringing, press the End key. e). Managing active calls When you are in an active call, the Session Manager displays each call in a separate cell, as shown: Edition Eleven Page 108 of 289

109 An active call has a light blue field when it is highlighted. An active call has a green field when another session cell is highlighted. Soft key presses affect highlighted cells. In the above example, you can see how the soft keys change when you highlight an active call. When you are in an active call, the Active call icon displays in the Session Manager beside the active call cell and the Hold soft key displays. f). Holding a call Press the Hold soft key to place an active call on hold. When you place a call on hold, the Call on hold displays in the Session Manager beside the active call cell and the Resume soft key displays. icon g). Resuming a call Press the Resume soft key or the OK key to resume a held call to active status. Note: If you have more than one call on hold, use the and keys to highlight one of them, then press the Resume soft key or OK to make it an active call. h). Muting a call To mute yourself in the call, press the Mute soft key. A Mute icon displays in the status bar. Now you can still hear the other party, but that person can t hear you. Press Resume to resume audio flow. i). Speakerphone To activate the speakerphone, press the Speaker soft key and select the Speakerphone option. j). Transferring a call Your handset can perform three types of transfers: Blind: A blind transfer exits the call while the second party is ringing before the two other parties are connected. Consultative: In a consultative transfer, you may speak to either of the two other parties before making the transfer. Edition Eleven Page 109 of 289

110 Attended: An attended transfer connects all three parties as in a conference call. You may stay in the conversation or hang up. Blind Transfer: While in an active call, or with the call on hold: 1. Press the Features soft key and select Blind Transfer. A dial tone will sound and the Dialer will open. 2. Dial the number of the target party. If the Autocomplete feature matches the number you are dialing to a stored number, select the matching number and press Start or OK to place the call. Note: Once you dial a call, the transfer is complete and you are returned to the Home screen whether or not the other party answers the call. If there are other active sessions, you will be returned to the Session Manager. Consultative Transfer: 1. While in an active call or with a call on hold highlighted in the Session Manager, press the Features soft key and select Transfer. 2. Dial the number of the target party. If the Autocomplete feature matches the number you are dialing to a stored number, select the matching number and press Start to place the call. 3. When the target party answers, explain that you are going to transfer the call. 4. Press the Features soft key and select Transfer to complete the transfer. You are returned to the Home screen or if other calls are active, to the Session Manager. Attended Transfer: 1. While in an active call, press the Features soft key and select Conference. 2. Dial the number of the target party. If the Autocomplete feature matches the number you are dialing to a stored number, select the matching number and press Start or OK to place the call. For more information about the Autocomplete feature, see Using the Dialer. 3. When the target party answers, explain that you are going to transfer the call. 4. Press the Features soft key and select Conference to complete the transfer. You are returned to the Home Edition Eleven Page 110 of 289

111 screen or, if other calls are active, to the Session Manager. 5. To exit the call, ensure the conference cell is highlighted (light blue) and press End. After exiting, you are returned to the Home screen or, if other calls are active, to the Session Manager. Note: If you press the End key while a conference participant s cell is selected, you will end that participant s connection to the conference call. k). Conference calls 1. While in an active call or with the call on hold highlighted in the Session Manager, press the Features soft key and select Conference. 2. Dial the number of the target party. If the Autocomplete feature matches the number you are dialing to a stored number, select the matching number and press Start to place the call. 3. When the target party answers, explain that you are going to set up a conference call. 4. Press the Features soft key and select Conference to complete the transfer. When all three participants are connected to the conference call, the Session Manager will display as shown: 5. To exit the call, ensure the conference cell is highlighted (light blue) and press End. After exiting, you are returned to the Home screen or if other calls are active, to the Session Manager. Note: By default, the maximum number of participants in a conference call is 3. If you want to add more than 3 participants, talk to your system administrator. Adding participants to conference call: 1. Set up a conference call. 2. Press the Features soft key and select Conference. The Dialer opens. 3. Dial the number of the party you wish to add. If the Autocomplete feature matches the number you are dialing to a stored number, select the matching number and press Start or OK to place the call. 4. When the new party answers, press the Conference soft key to add the new party as a participant to the existing conference call. Edition Eleven Page 111 of 289

112 Muting your microphone during a conference call: 1. During a conference call, in the Session Manager, highlight the Active: Conference call cell. 2. Press the Mute soft key. When you press the Mute soft key, only your microphone is muted. Putting your phone on hold: 1. During a conference call, in the Session Manager, highlight the Active: Conference call cell. 2. Press the Hold soft key. Resuming conferencing: 1. During a conference call, in the Session Manager, highlight the Active: Conference call cell. 2. Press the Resume soft key. Managing conference call participants: To remove a participant from the conference, in the Session Manager, highlight the participant s call cell and press the Remove soft key. To mute a participant, in the Session Manager, highlight the participant s call cell and press the FarMute soft key. To place a participant on hold, in the Session Manager, highlight the participant s call cell and press the Hold soft key. To add the participant back to the conference call, highlight the participant s call cell, and press the Resume soft key. Exiting a conference call: To exit a conference call, in the Session Manager, highlight the Active: Conference call cell and press End. The other parties remain connected. Edition Eleven Page 112 of 289

113 Splitting conference calls into two calls on hold: 1. During a conference call, in the Session Manager, highlight the Active: Conference call cell. Press the Features soft key and select Split. 2. The conference ends and each participant is split into an individual call cell and put on hold. l). Forwarding calls Manually forwarding an incoming call: 1. When the phone alerts you to an incoming call, select the Forward soft key. Note: The Forward-to-Dial screen displays the last number that a call was forwarded to (either manually or automatically). If you want to forward the call to a different number, enter the target number as you would through the Dialer. Be quick about this sequence as you only have the ring period to accomplish the forward. 2. When the forwarding number displays, press OK. The incoming call is forwarded to the other party and you are disconnected. Enabling automatic call forwarding: 1. From the Home screen, navigate to Settings > Feature Settings > Forward, as shown. Edition Eleven Page 113 of 289

114 2. If your handset is set up with a single line, the Forwarding Type Select screen displays, enabling you to select the forwarding type you want. If you have multiple lines, select Line. The Line Select screen displays. Highlight the line you wish to enable with call forwarding, and press OK. 3. You may enable the following call forwarding options: Always: To forward all incoming calls No Answer: To forward all unanswered incoming calls Busy: To forward incoming calls when you re in an active call Enable one of the forwarding options and press the OK key. 4. Depending on your selection, do one of the following: If you selected Always, enter the forwarding number. If you selected No Answer, enter a forwarding number and then select Forward After Rings, and enter how many rings should be played before forwarding the call (one ring is about 6 seconds). A value of 2 is recommended. If you selected Busy, enter a forwarding number for calls that come in when you re in an active session. Edition Eleven Page 114 of 289

115 5. Press the Enable soft key to confirm call forwarding. 6. Press Home to return to the Home screen. Disabling call forwarding: 1. Perform one of the following actions: If you have a single line, choose Settings > Feature Settings > Forward. If you have multiple lines, select Settings > Feature Settings > Forward > Line to display the Line Select screen and choose the line on which you want to disable call forwarding. 2. If you ve selected a line, or if your handset is set up with a single line, the Forwarding Type Select screen displays, enabling you to select the forwarding type you want. Highlight the Enabled forwarding type and press the Disable soft key. 3. Press Home to return to the Home screen. m). Do Not Disturb (DND) Enabling DND on all lines: From the Home screen, navigate to Settings > Features > Do Not Disturb and press OK. DND is now enabled and the DND icon displays on the Status Bar. Disabling DND on all lines: From the Home screen, navigate to Settings > Features > Do Not Disturb and press OK. DND is now disabled and the DND icon does not display on the Status Bar. Enabling DND on a single line when DND for a single line is enabled: 1. From the Home screen, navigate to Settings > Features > Do Not Disturb. When you select the DND feature, the Line Select screen displays. 2. Highlight the line you want to enable with DND and press OK. 3. Press the Enable soft key. The DND icon now displays on the Line bar in the Line Select screen. Enabling and Disabling DND on all lines when single line DND is enabled: Once you enable one line with DND, the Set All and Clear All soft keys display. Press one of these to enable or disable DND for all lines. n). Speed Dial Dialing from the Favorites menu: 1. From the Home screen, press the Favorites soft key. The contacts displayed on this menu are the contacts at the top of your speed dial list, as shown: Edition Eleven Page 115 of 289

116 2. Scroll to a contact and press Start or press the contact index number, for example 1 on the keypad. Dialing from the Speed Dial list: 1. From the Home screen, press the Features soft key and select Speed Dial. A list of speed dial contacts displays. Scroll through the list to view all speed dial contacts, as shown. 2. Scroll to a contact and press Start or press the contact index number, for example 1 on the keypad. Adding a Speed Dial contact: 1. Open the Contacts / Call Lists icon on the Home screen and choose Contact Directory. Your contact directory opens. 2. Choose a contact and press the Edit soft key. The Edit Contact screen displays. 3. Scroll to Speed Dial Index and enter a speed-dial index number for that contact. 4. Press the Save soft key. Edition Eleven Page 116 of 289

117 o). Voic Note: Voic is an optional feature. See your system administrator to set up a voic account. 1. Navigate to Messages > Voic . 2. If you have multiple lines: a. Choose Line. The Line Select screen displays. b. Highlight a line and press OK. The Messages screen displays and Voic is highlighted. 3. Press OK to select Voic . 4. Press the Connect soft key to access your mail, and follow the visual prompts on the screen. 5. If you want to delete voic messages, press the Clear soft key. 6. Press Home to return to the Home screen. p). Battery Charging You must fully charge your handset s Battery Pack before you use it for the first time. Depending on the type of charger you use, this might take several hours. Note: Only use SpectraLink 8400 Series Battery Packs with SpectraLink 8400 Handsets. Check the label on the Battery Pack and ensure the model number is RS657 for the Standard Capacity Battery Pack or RS658 for the Extended Capacity Battery Pack. The Battery Pack icon at the right side of the Status Bar of your handset is completely green when it is fully charged. When the handset is in a charging device and charging, the Battery Pack icon has a lightning Edition Eleven Page 117 of 289

118 bolt symbol through it. When the background of this icon turns green, the Battery Pack is fully charged. Battery packs: Two types of Battery Packs are available: Standard and Extended. The Standard lithium ion rechargeable handset Battery Pack gives you approximately eight hours of talk time or 80 hours of standby time. Standby time occurs when the handset is on but not in an active call. The Extended model gives you approximately 12 hours of talk time and 120 hours of standby time. Charging times vary according to the type of charger you are using. Using the dual charger: The Dual Charger (DCA39), as shown, is designed to charge the Battery Pack while keeping the handset operational. You may charge one Battery Pack by placing the handset in the front charging bay, and charge a second Battery Pack in the rear-charging slot. When both slots are occupied, the front charging bay has charging priority. The battery status icon on the handset indicates the charging status of the Battery Packs. When the handset is fully charged or removed, the rear Battery Pack will begin charging. Battery pack removal/replacement: To remove the Battery Pack from the handset, press up on the Battery Pack removal latch on the back of the handset. The Battery Pack releases outward. To replace the battery Pack, slide the tab of the Battery Pack into the bottom slot as shown below. Gently push the top of the Battery Pack until it snaps into place. You should not have to force it against the handset. Edition Eleven Page 118 of 289

119 Battery Pack life will vary depending on your handset s model and its features and system infrastructure. Ensure that you fully charge the Battery Pack the first few times, as the Battery Pack becomes most efficient after the first few charge cycles. If multiple Battery Packs are supplied with your handset, Polycom recommends that each be fully charged upon receipt to prolong battery life. Battery Packs will slowly lose charge if unused. To maintain battery potential, charge unused Battery Packs occasionally or alternate Battery Pack use. After a length of time, Battery Packs will lose the ability to maintain a charge and to perform at maximum capacity and will need to be replaced. This is normal for all batteries. If your Battery Pack requires replacement, contact your system administrator. Overnight charging is best done while the handset is turned off. If the handset does not charge, clean the Battery Pack, the charger and the handset contacts with an alcohol swab. When the handset is properly seated, the backlight comes on briefly and the handset beeps to indicate that charging has begun. Any battery that exhibits swelling, cracking or other abnormality should be disposed of promptly and properly. Dispose of any used battery promptly. Keep away from children. Do not disassemble and do not dispose of in fire. The handset is not designed for and will not function properly with third party batteries. q). User Settings The User Settings menu contains all the options you need to customize your handset settings for optimum use. Navigate to this menu from the Home screen Settings icon. Use the tables shown as a quick reference to find the option you need. Edition Eleven Page 119 of 289

120 Edition Eleven Page 120 of 289

121 Edition Eleven Page 121 of 289

122 Edition Eleven Page 122 of 289

123 a). Answering a Call 12. snom Phones (Note) on the snom 300 / 320 / 360 / 370 an incoming call is indicated by an audible ringer and a blinking (yellow) line indicator. Additionally the snom 370 has a flashing red Call Indication LED at the top of the phone display. This indicator will remain steady when a call is in progress. If you are already on a call incoming call indication will be an audible beep and a change in the phones display. Using the Handset: 1. Pick up the handset. Using Hands-Free Speakerphone Mode: 2. Press, or with the handset on hook press the line key with the active indicator (yellow blinking), or the Confirm key. Using the (optional) Headset: 3. Press to switch the phone to headset mode. When using the snom 360 or 370 the icon will appear in the phone display. You may either press the key, blinking line indicator or the Confirm key to answer your call. In all cases the active call will appear on the display showing call duration and caller ID. 4. (Note) When using a snom 300, to switch the phone to headset mode press 4 times to enter Setup / Use headset Device -> <On>. The symbol will appear in the phone display. Repeat the process to turn off or press the Speaker button to toggle between headset and speaker mode. Handling multiple calls: 5. With a call in progress any subsequent calls are displayed by a change in the phones display screen. The user will also hear a short tone to indicate another call is present. Select the Confirm key or on a snom 360 / 370 press the Ok soft key to accept the call. 6. Your original caller is automatically placed on hold indicated by a slow flashing (yellow) line indicator. Additionally the snom 370 displays a slow flashing red Call Indication LED at the top of the phone display. 7. Press to navigate through the calls. Press the Confirm key to select. 8. Once the phone reaches its multiple call limit the next caller will either hear Voic or follow the phones Find-Me / Follow-Me settings if configured. Edition Eleven Page 123 of 289

124 12. snom Phones (contd) b). Making a Call Using the handset: 1. Pick up the handset, the yellow line indicator will light, dial the desired number. Press the Confirm key to complete the call. Additionally the snom 370 has a steady red Call Indication LED at the top of the phone display. Using Hands Free Speaker Phone Mode: 2. With the handset on-hook, press or the line key (solid yellow LED when pressed). Dial the desired number. 3. Press the Confirm key to complete the call. 4. Alternatively you may dial the number first then press to complete the call. Using the (optional) Headset: 1. Press to switch the phone to headset mode. When using the snom 360 or 370 the icon will appear in the phone display. 2. (Note) When using a snom 300, to switch the phone to headset mode press 4 times to enter Setup / Use headset Device -> <On>. The symbol will appear in the phone display. Repeat the process to turn off or press the Speaker button to toggle between headset and speaker mode. 3. Dial the desired number and press the Confirm key to complete the call or press the line key (solid yellow LED when pressed). Redial: 1. To redial last number press twice. 2. To redial previously dialed numbers press. A list of recently dialed numbers will be displayed with the most recent at the top of the list. Use the navigation keys to move through the list. Press the Confirm key over a displayed or highlighted entry to complete the call. Outgoing CallerID: 1. Your phone can be configured to display the Outgoing CallerID of your main number (default setting) or any other number that is configured on your system. 2. The CallerID can also be set to Blocked. 3. System Administration access is required to change these settings. 4. A typical setup could be to display the main company CallerID on the first line appearance and another ID or Blocked for subsequent line appearances. 5. To use this feature, once configured, press the down arrow on the navigation keys to select the second line appearance to make your call (Note) not available on the snom Your Outgoing CallerID will reflect what s set in the Star2Star Web Portal. Edition Eleven Page 124 of 289

125 7. Press up arrow on the navigation keys to re select the first line appearance. Input Mode: 1. Your phone can be set to enter Alphanumeric Characters instead of numbers (indicated by the phone display). This can cause confusion when trying to dial out. 2. To return to the normal Numeric Mode to make outgoing calls on the snom 300 press down arrow on the navigation keys. On the snom 320 / 360 / 370 press the first soft key. c). Microphone Mute 1. During a call press or the Mute soft key (snom 320 / 360 / 370) so that the other party cannot hear you. Additionally the snom 370 display changes showing a symbol. 2. Press again or the Unmute soft key to resume audio. d). Holding a Call 1. (snom 320 / 360 / 370) During a call press. The call will be placed on hold, the yellow line key indicator will flash slowly, and Hold will be indicated on the phone display. The caller on hold will hear Music or Message on hold if enabled on your system. Additionally the snom 370 displays a slow flashing red Call Indication LED at the top of the phone display. 2. (snom 300) During a call press the Line key L1. The call will be placed on hold, the yellow line key indicator will flash slowly, and Hold will be indicated on the phone display. The caller on hold will hear Music or Message on hold if enabled on your system. 3. (snom 320 / 360 / 370) To resume the call press again, the flashing line key or press the Confirm key. 4. (snom 300) To resume the call press the flashing line key L1 or press the Confirm key. 5. (snom 320 / 360 / 370) Your phone will handle multiple calls on hold. Press to display all calls on hold. Use the navigation keys to move through the list. Press the Confirm key or over a displayed or highlighted entry to retrieve the call from hold. 6. (snom 300) Your phone will handle multiple calls on hold. Press the line key to display all calls on hold. Use the navigation keys to move through the list. Press the Confirm key or line key over a displayed or highlighted entry to retrieve the call from hold. Edition Eleven Page 125 of 289

126 12. snom Phones (contd) e). Transferring a Call Blind Transfer (Transfer the call to another party without any announcement): 1. During a call, press. The caller on hold will hear Music or Message on hold if enabled on your system. 2. Dial the number you want to transfer the call to then press the Confirm key to complete the transfer. Transfer (Announced): 1. When using (snom 320 / 360 / 370) place your caller on hold by pressing or press the line key L1 if using the (snom 300). Your caller will hear Music or Message on hold if enabled on your system. 2. Dial the number you want to transfer the call to then press the Confirm key. 3. When the called party answers, announce the call, press and then press again or to complete the transfer. 4. Press to cancel the transfer i.e. the called party does not wish to accept the call. f). Ending a Call 1. Replace the handset, or if in hands free speaker phone mode press the Cancel key, or press. If you are using the phone in mode press the Cancel key to end your call. g). Creating a 3 Party Conference Call 1. You can create a conference with two other parties using the phones local conferencing feature. 2. Place a call to the first party. 3. Place the active call on hold (snom 320 / 360 / 370) press, (snom 300) press the line key. The caller will hear Music or Message on hold if enabled on your system. 4. Dial the phone number of the second party or use to access your Speed Dial entries. Use the navigation keys to move through the list. Press the entry to complete the call. Confirm key over a displayed or highlighted 5. When the second party answers, (snom 320 / 360 / 370) press to join all parties in the Conference. (snom 300) press to join all parties in the Conference. Edition Eleven Page 126 of 289

127 12. snom Phones (contd) h). Volume Controls 1. Press the keys to adjust handset, headset and hands-free speaker phone volume during a call. 2. Pressing these keys in an idle state will adjust the ringer volume. i). Do Not Disturb 1. Press the key on the phone or the DND soft key. 2. The following icons/prompts will appear in the display of each respective phone model to indicate that the Do Not Disturb feature is active. a. Snom 300 DND b. snom 320 c. snom 360 d. snom Incoming calls will not ring the phone with this feature activated. Callers will be directed to your voic or Find-Me / Follow-Me if invoked. 4. You will still be able to make outgoing calls with the DND feature activated. 5. Pressing again deactivates the feature. j). Missed Call Display 1. To view missed calls and clear the missed call display when using snom 320 / 360 / 370 press. On a snom 300 press. 2. On the snom 360 or 370 use the or navigation keys to select Missed Calls. Press. On a snom 300 press. 3. When using the snom 320 select soft key. 4. Use the soft keys to navigate through the list. Alternatively if you are using a snom 360 or 370 you may use the navigation keys. 5. Press to return to the previous screen. 6. (Note) you may also view Received and Dialed calls. 7. If you are using the snom 320 press the Details soft key and to display more information about the call (Date/Time etc). For the snom 360 or 370 press the Next soft key and to display more Edition Eleven Page 127 of 289

128 information about the call (Date/Time etc). When using a snom 300 press. 12. snom Phones Missed Call Display (contd) 8. To dial a number using the Missed, Received or Dialed call list, press the Confirm key over a displayed or highlighted entry to complete the call. 9. Press the Clear soft key to remove entries. k). Changing Ringtones 1. snom 320 / 360 / 370 press the key. a. snom 360 / 370 i. Use the navigation keys to select option 2 Ring Tone. ii. Press or the Ok soft key to select. iii. Use the or navigation keys to select the line appearance. iv. Generally all calls to your phone will appear on the first Line appearance, unless your system administrator or Dealer has configured the system to use the second line appearance. v. When Line1 is displayed or highlighted press or the Ok soft key to select. vi. A list of available Ring Tones will appear. vii. Use the or navigation keys to select the required Ring Tone. viii. A displayed or highlighted Ring Tone is played back. ix. Press to return to the previous screen after making your selection. b. snom 300 / 320 i. Press 3 times to reach Configuration. ii. Select Reg. iii. Use the or navigation keys to select the line appearance. iv. Generally all calls to your phone will appear on the first Line appearance, unless your system administrator or Dealer has configured the system to use the second line appearance. v. A displayed or Ring Tone is played back vi. Use the or navigation keys to select the required Ring Tone. Edition Eleven Page 128 of 289

129 12. snom Phones (contd) l). Voic Access 1. The message waiting light will flash (snom 370 red), (snom 300 / 320 / 360 yellow) to indicate that a new message is waiting. When you lift the handset Stuttering Dial Tone is played. 2. To listen to voice messages on a snom 320 / 360 / 370 press the key or dial When using a snom 300 dial Alternatively on a snom 320 / 360 / 370 you may press the VMail soft key as indicated on the phone display. On the snom 300, when VMail is indicated in the phone display, press the Confirm key to connect to the voice mail system. 3. The system will prompt for your password. (Note) as a new user accessing your mailbox for the first time, your password will be the same as your extension number. You will be guided through a short setup process including a password change. Set a password that is different to the extension number. See section Setting up your Voic . Edition Eleven Page 129 of 289

130 12. snom Phones (contd) m). Speed Dials Description This option allows the user to add / manage individual speed dial numbers for their phone. Items that appear in the Destinations list can be selected. This option also provides the ability to add custom numbers and labels for easy identification i.e. those not in Applications as Dial External Numbers. The number of available speed dials will change if a user has an expansion key module associated with the phone. The number of modules can be set in Basic Settings under the P H O N E S Y S T E M C O N F I G U R A T I O N Menu. Select the Extensions link. The following phones sold by Star2Star Communications can be fitted with an Expansion Module, sometimes also referred to as a Sidecar : Polycom IP 601, IP 650, IP670 Snom 320, 360, 370 Grandstream GXP2000 Cisco SPA502G, SPA504G, SPA508G, SPA509G and the SPA525G2 Setup 1. Select the Speed Dials option under I N D I V I D U A L P H O N E S E T T I N G S to change the settings associated with the Speed Dial feature. (Note) not available on the snom 300 or m3. 2. Remember to Save Changes to PBX and reboot the phone. To reboot the phone unplug the internet cable momentarily. The phone will restart. (Note) if the phone has a separate power cable connected, momentarily unplug that cable to reboot the phone. Edition Eleven Page 130 of 289

131 12. snom Phones - Speed Dials (contd) 3. To add a Custom Number and label for easy identification, select the Add Custom Number toward the bottom of the selection list. Add the number and associated label. (Note) this feature is available for the following phones; Polycom, Grandstream and snom (not 300 or m3). Select the Add Custom Number option. Enter the Custom number and Label. Edition Eleven Page 131 of 289

132 12. snom Phones - Speed Dials (contd) 1. To access the individual Speed Dial directory entries added via the Star2Star web portal press the button or (snom 320 / 360 / 370) select the Directory/Dir soft key. (note) The snom 300 will only provide access to the Company Directory. 2. Your Speed Dial entries will be displayed. 3. Use the or navigation keys to browse the entries. 4. Press over a highlighted or displayed entry to dial. 5. The following example shows the Speed Dial Options for a snom (320 / 360 / 370) phone with 1 Expansion module added. You can also add Speed Dials to utilize the remaining available buttons on the phone. (Note) not available on the snom 300 or m3. There are 12 keys/leds on your snom phone. The first 2 are reserved for lines. There are 10 keys available for Speed Dial programming. (note) only 6 keys will be available if your system is set to Key System Mode (see example) as 4 keys/led positions 3 6 are reserved for Park Positions. A snom expansion module has 42 physical keys/leds available. Up to 3 modules can be fitted to a snom 320 / 360 / 370. Using the available buttons on the phone this could give a total of 136 keys or 132 if your system is set to Key System Mode. All available keys can be programmed via the Speed Dials option in the Star2Star Web Portal. You may append the Company Directory to your speed dial list, including any other locations. Edition Eleven Page 132 of 289

133 12. snom Phones (contd) n). Call Park ( Key System Mode ) 1. When using the snom 320 / 360 / 370 phones your system can be programmed to operate in Key System Mode which emulates a squared key system when parking calls in that the system provides shared park positions. This feature is not available on the snom 300 phone. When a call is active on your phone press the key to park the call. The system sets a default value of 4 calls that can be parked on your phone in this manner and will be visible to other snom 320 / 360 / 370 phone users. However this value can be changed in the Location Information for your system by a system administrator or your dealer. Each call occupies a different park/line position that will be visible (solid yellow LED) to other phone users on your system. You can retrieve the parked call from the respective park/line position from any snom 320 / 360 / 370 phone on your system: Line Keys Shared Park Positions. Four positions are created by default. However more can be created by your System Administrator or Dealer. 2. Alternatively you can park a call on a local phone (non remote) and retrieve from a different local phone perform an attended (Announced) transfer to Use this process for the snom 300. a. See section Transferring a Call 3. The system will play back a retrieval code ( ). The retrieval code 7001 relates to a snom 320 / 360 / 370 shared park position #1. The retrieval code 7002 relates to a snom 320 / 360 / 370 shared park position #2. etc. a. The system provides up to 99 park positions 4. When the caller is Parked they will hear Message / Music on hold if enabled on your system. 5. To retrieve the call, dial the retrieval code to reconnect to the call. 6. If the call remains parked for longer than the system timeout (see On-Hold Options in the Portal Advanced Settings) the call will ring back on the originating extension. Edition Eleven Page 133 of 289

134 12. snom Phones (contd) o). Expansion Modules The following Star2Star snom phones can be fitted with an Expansion Module also sometimes known as a sidecar. Compatible Phones Expansion Module Unit Description Features snom 320 snom 360 snom 370 p). Phone Options The unit is self powered and has 42 programmable buttons with LED s. Up to 3 units can be fitted to a single phone. Use the Star2Star web portal Speed Dial option to configure your expansion module. Commonly used numbers can be added either from the system Application-Dial External Numbers or custom numbers and labels. You can also add extensions and monitor the presence of a local extension. Generally you would monitor an extension on its Line 1 appearance. This is where all calls arrive by default. (Note) When monitoring extensions the lamp will only light when the extension is actually connected to a call or ringing with a new call. snom users can set additional phone options using the Star2Star web portal. 1. Select Phone Options under I N D I V I D U A L P H O N E S E T T I N G S to configure the following options: a. Change Speaker Phone Settings. b. Configure Holding Reminder Tone. c. Configure the Handset Mic Volume. d. Change the Auto Dial Timeout. (Note) the phone will start to dial by default after 3 seconds. e. Change the Call Waiting behavior (Audible tone On/Off or Visual only). Click here to change Phone Options Edition Eleven Page 134 of 289

135 12. snom Phones (contd) q). PA1 Paging Device Description The snom PA1 provides a very simple way to deliver cost effective paging for your business. It is setup like any other phone in the Star2Star Web Portal with an extension number with no user associated. The unit is pre built with wall mounting brackets. A drill template and screws are also provided. The snom PA1 contains the following outputs: Sound Amplifier - Embedded Class D 4W power amplifier. This amplifier can support a small unpowered speaker at 8Ω. Sound Output Push-on speaker terminals labeled Speaker, LINE out 3.5mm jack labeled Line Out. We would suggest the push-on 8Ω speaker connection for small installations and the 3.5mm Line Out jack for larger setups. Typically using a stereo male 3.5mm jack to dual RCA (phono) cable you can connect the output of the snom PA1 through a separately provided amplifier and associated speakers. Operation Call the extension number assigned to the snom PA1. The call will be automatically answered and audio will be present at the speaker or amplifier and associated speakers. Edition Eleven Page 135 of 289

136 13. snom m3 IP DECT Wireless Phone Edition Eleven Page 136 of 289

137 13. snom m3 IP DECT Wireless Phone (contd) a). Answering a Call 1. Pickup the handset and press the Green Phone key. 2. You can also set the handset to auto answer when lifted from the charger or answer when any key is pressed. Access the menu by pressing the OK Key. Navigate to Settings using the navigational keys. Press the OK Key to select. Use the navigational keys to select Telephony settings. Press the OK Key to select. Use the navigational keys to select Answer mode. Both options are displayed (Auto answer / Any key answer). Handling multiple calls: 1. With a call already in progress on your phone, you can answer a subsequent call if required. 2. When the call arrives you will hear a single call waiting tone and call waiting will appear in the handset display. 3. To answer the new call, press the Green Phone key. 4. Your original call will be placed on hold and will hear Music/Message on hold if configured on your system. 5. Press the Options key to either swap the calls, initiate a 3 party conference or transfer. 6. Alternatively you may press the Reject key to divert the new incoming call to your voic . b). Making a Call 1. Enter the number you wish to dial and press the Green Phone key. 2. To make another call with one already in progress, press the hold key. 3. Your original caller will hear music / message on hold if configured on your system. 4. Enter the new number and press the Green Phone key to complete the call. 5. Press the Options key to either swap the calls, initiate a 3 party conference or transfer. Redial Last Number: 1. Press the Options soft key, select Redial and then press the OK key. The most recently dialed number is displayed. 2. Press the Green phone key to call the number. 3. Alternatively select the Call log soft key to access a list of all calls made. The Call log lists Missed, Incoming, Outgoing calls. c). Microphone Mute 1. During a call press the Mute soft key. 2. Press the Mute off soft key to unmute. d). Holding a Call 1. During a call press the Hold soft key. The caller on hold will hear Music or Message on hold if enabled on your system. 2. To retrieve the call on hold press the Options soft key. 3. Select Retrieve call. 4. Press the OK key. Edition Eleven Page 137 of 289

138 13. snom m3 IP DECT Wireless Phone (contd) e). Transferring a Call Blind Transfer (Transfer the call to another party without any announcement): 1. During a call press the Hold soft key. 2. Select the Options soft key. 3. Select Transfer and press the OK key. 4. Enter the number you wish to transfer to and press the OK key. 5. The call is transferred with no announcement. Transfer (Announced): 1. During a call press the Hold soft key. 2. Enter the number you wish to transfer to and press the Green phone key to connect. 3. Announce the call when connected to the other party. 4. To transfer select the Options soft key. 5. Select Transfer and press the OK key. 6. The call is transferred. f). Ending a Call 1. Press the Red phone key. g). Creating a 3 Party Conference 1. With a call in progress, press the Hold soft key. 2. Enter the number you wish to conference with. 3. When the other party answers select the Options soft key. 4. Select Conference to connect all 3 parties together. h). Volume controls 1. To adjust the handset or speaker volume during a call. Press the VOLUME UP / DOWN keys on the side of the handset. 2. To adjust the ringer volume and or melody, access the menu by pressing the OK Key. 3. Navigate to Settings using the navigational keys. Press the OK Key to select. 4. Use the navigational keys to select Audio settings. Press the OK Key to select. 5. Select Ringer volume. 6. Use the VOLUME UP / VOLUME DOWN keys on the side of the handset or the navigational up / down keys to change volume settings. i). Missed call display 1. To quickly clear the missed call display and access the missed call log on your phone press the OK key. 2. You may select the Call log soft key at any time to display (Missed / Incoming / Outgoing) calls. 3. Use the up / down navigational keys to move through the list of calls. 4. Use the left / right navigational keys to select call type i.e. Missed / Incoming / Outgoing / All calls. Edition Eleven Page 138 of 289

139 13. snom m3 IP DECT Wireless Phone (contd) 5. Press the OK key over a highlighted entry to view call details. 6. Press the Green phone key to connect. j). Voic Access 1. The handset display will indicate!new Voic and the icon when new messages arrive. 2. To access the Voic system with the!new Voic display on the handset screen, press the OK key. 3. Press OK again and then press the Play Soft key to connect to the Voic system. 4. Alternatively you can dial 1000 to access the Voic system at any time. 5. The system will prompt for your password. (Note) as a new user accessing your mailbox for the first time, your password will be the same as your extension number. You will be guided through a short setup process including a password change. Set a password that is different to the extension number. See section Setting up your Voic . See also Voic Guide. k). How to Lock / Unlock the keypad 1. If you are carrying the handset around, you can lock the keypad so that you do not use it accidentally. 2. In idle mode press the * key, and then press the Lock soft key. 3. To unlock, press the * key, and then press the Unlock soft key. l). Call Park 1. To park a call on a local phone (non remote) and retrieve from a different local phone perform an attended (Announced) transfer to a. See section Transferring a Call 2. The system will play back a retrieval code ( ). a. The system provides up to 99 park positions 3. When the caller is Parked they will hear Message / Music on hold if enabled on your system. 4. To retrieve the call, dial the retrieval code to reconnect to the call. 5. If the call remains parked for longer than the system timeout (see On-Hold Options in the Portal Advanced Settings) the call will ring back on the originating extension. Edition Eleven Page 139 of 289

140 a). Answering a Call 14. Cisco Phones (SPA525G2) Using the Handset: 1. Pick up the handset. Using the Speakerphone: 2. Press, Answer soft key or (red flashing line button). Using the optional Headset: 3. Press to answer the call using a headset. b). Making a Call Using the Handset: 1. Pick up the handset and dial the desired number. 2. Press the Dial soft key to complete the call. Using the hands-free Speakerphone: 1. With the handset on-hook, either press (speaker button), or (a line button). Dial the desired number. 2. Press the Dial soft key to complete the call. Using the optional Headset: 1. With the headset connected, press (headset button), or (a line button). Dial the desired number. 2. Press the Dial soft key to complete the call. Handling multiple calls: 1. With a call in progress the next call to the phone will be indicated by a change in the phones display screen indicating that a call is waiting and showing caller information for the call. The user will also hear a short call waiting tone to indicate another call is present. The line button and indicator at the top of the phone will flash red. Select the Answer soft key or flashing line button to answer the call. 2. Your original caller is automatically placed on hold and the display information for the call will appear on screen. 3. Press the blinking line button to toggle between calls. 4. If you receive additional calls the caller will be connected to your voic or follow the path of Find-Me / Follow-Me if configured for your phone. (Note) During a call, you can alternate between handset, headset, or hands-free modes by pressing the or buttons. Edition Eleven Page 140 of 289

141 14. Cisco Phones SPA525G2 (contd) Redial: 1. Press the Redial soft key and use the navigation arrows to select the desired number from the Place Call list. 2. Lift the handset or press the Dial soft key. 3. Select the EditDial soft key to edit the number selected before dialing e.g. to add an area code. Call History: 1. To access a list of All Calls, Missed Calls, Received Calls, or Placed Calls press. 2. Use the Navigation button (down arrow) to scroll to Option 2 Call History. Press the Select soft key. 3. Use the Navigation button (down/up arrow) to scroll to the required option. 4. Use the Navigation button (down/up arrow) again to scroll to the required entry. 5. Press the Dial soft key to call the number displayed. 6. Select the EditDial soft key to edit the number selected before dialing e.g. to add an area code. 7. You may also select the Option soft key for the following options: a. Delete Entry (Deletes a specific call history entry) b. Delete List (Deletes all entries for a specific call history list) c. Add to Address Book (Add the call detail to your personal address book) Outgoing CallerID: 1. Your phone can be configured to display the Outgoing CallerID of your main number (default setting) or any other number that is configured on your system. 2. The CallerID can also be set to Blocked. 3. System Administration access is required to change these settings. 4. A typical setup could be to display the main company CallerID on the first line appearance and another ID or Blocked for subsequent line appearances. 5. To use this feature, once configured, select the relevant line button 1 5 to make your call. 6. Your Outgoing CallerID will reflect what s set in the Star2Star Web Portal. c). Microphone Mute 1. To mute the phone microphone, speaker, or headset microphone press. The button will glow red. 2. The other party cannot hear you. 3. Press (microphone mute button) again to unmute and resume audio. d). Holding a Call 1. During a call either press the Hold soft key or hold button to place the call on hold. 2. The line button flashes red. 3. The caller on hold will hear Music or Message on hold if enabled on your system. 4. Press the Resume soft key or flashing red line button to re establish the call. Edition Eleven Page 141 of 289

142 14. Cisco Phones SPA525G2 (contd) e). Transferring a Call Blind Transfer (Transfer without announcement): 1. During a call, press (right arrow) then press the BlindXfer soft key. 2. The caller on hold will hear Music or Message on hold if enabled on your system. 3. Dial the number you want to transfer the call to then press the Dial soft key to complete the transfer. 4. Alternatively during a call press the Transfer soft key, dial the number you require then press the Dial soft key followed by the Transfer soft key to complete the transfer. Transfer (Announced): 1. During a call, press the Transfer soft key. 2. The caller on hold will hear Music or Message on hold if enabled on your system. 3. Dial the number you want to transfer the call to and then press the Dial soft key. 4. When the called party answers announce the call. 5. Press the Transfer soft key to complete the transfer. f). Ending a Call 1. Press the End Call soft key or replace the handset. 2. Press (line button) if you are using the Speakerphone, headset or handset. 3. Alternatively you may also press (headset button) if you are using a headset. g). Creating a 3 Party Conference Call To create a three-way local conference call: 1. You can create a conference with two other parties using the phones local conferencing feature. 2. During an active call, press (right arrow) then press the Conf soft key to create a new call. 3. The active call is placed on hold and the caller will hear Music or Message on hold if enabled on your system. 4. Dial the phone number of the second party 5. When the second party answers, press the Conf soft key again to join all parties in the Conference. When you hang up, the other two parties are disconnected. To keep the other parties in a call, but disconnect you from the call, press the Join soft key. Use the Star2Star Conference room feature for larger conferences. h). Volume Controls 1. Press the volume button to adjust handset, headset and speakerphone volume during a call. 2. Pressing this button with the phone in an idle state will adjust the ringer volume. 3. Press the Save soft key to keep the setting. Edition Eleven Page 142 of 289

143 14. Cisco Phones SPA525G2 (contd) i). Missed Call Display Returning a Missed Call: 1. If the LCD screen shows a missed call, press the Call Rtn soft key to return the call. (Note) if the phone display shows multiple missed calls pressing the Call Rtn soft key will return the last missed call. 2. Press the Miss soft key to display a list of Missed Calls. 3. Use the Navigation button (down/up arrow) to scroll to the required entry. 4. Press the Dial soft key to call the number displayed. 5. Select the EditDial soft key to edit the number selected before dialing e.g. to add an area code. 6. You may also select the Option soft key for the following options: a. Delete Entry (Deletes a specific call history entry) b. Delete List (Deletes all entries for a specific call history list) c. Add to Address Book (Add the call detail to your personal address book) 7. If the LCD screen does not show a missed call, you can return a call from the Missed Call list. 8. To access a list of Missed Calls press to access Call History. 9. Use the Navigation button (down arrow) to scroll to Option 2 Call History. Press the Select soft key. 10. Use the Navigation button (down/up arrow) to scroll to Option 2 Missed Calls. Press the Select soft key. 11. Use the Navigation button (down/up arrow) again to scroll to the required entry. 12. Use the Dial soft key call the number displayed. 13. Select the EditDial soft key to edit the number selected before dialing e.g. to add an area code. 14. (Note) step 6 above also applies. j). Do Not Disturb 1. Press DND soft key. 2. A Do Not Disturb message will appear in the phone display. 3. Press the Clr DND soft key to turn off the feature. (Note) callers will be directed to Voice Mail or the Star2Star Find-Me / Follow- Me feature if invoked. k). Changing Ringtones 1. Press (setup button) to enter the Settings Menu. 2. Scroll to User Preferences and press Select. 3. Scroll to 2 Audio Preferences and press the Select soft key. 4. Scroll to the extension you wish to change. Typically all calls will arrive on Ext Press the right arrow navigation button to view and subsequently scroll the available ring tone options. 6. Press the Play soft key to listen. 7. When you have selected the tone you require press the Select soft key. 8. Press the Back soft key twice followed by the Exit soft key to return to the idle phone display. (Note) you may upload 2 custom mp3 ring tones. Edition Eleven Page 143 of 289

144 14. Cisco Phones SPA525G2 (contd) l). Voic Access 1. The indicator at the top of the phone will glow red when new message are waiting. A message envelop icon will appear against your extension number in the phone display. 2. To listen to voice messages press the button or dial The system will prompt for your password. (Note) as a new user accessing your mailbox for the first time, your password will be the same as your extension number. You will be guided through a short setup process including a password change. Set a password that is different to the extension number. See section Setting up your Voic . m). Directory The Company Extension Directory is automatically downloaded to the phone. 1. To access the Directory press (setup button). 2. Use the navigation arrows to select option 1 Directories. Press the Select soft key. 3. The phone will display 2 options: - Personal Address Book You can add up to 300 entries into the phone directly. Each entry contains a number of fields i.e. Name / Work No / Mobile No / Home No / Ring Tone. (Note) you can also import contacts directly from a Bluetooth enabled mobile phone. View the Star2Star Phone and Features Guide for details on this feature. - Directory The corporate extension directory is automatically downloaded to the phone. The phone will display 32 entries at a time. Press the Next soft key to display additional entries as required. 4. Using the navigation arrows select the directory you require and press the Select soft key. 5. Use the navigation arrows to select the entry you require. 6. Press the Option soft key (Personal Address Book only) to use the Search feature to locate a specific entry. 7. Press the Dial soft key to dial the entry you require. n). Call Park 1. To park a call on a local phone (non remote) and retrieve from a different local phone, with a call in progress press the Park soft key. 2. The phone will automatically park the call. 3. The caller will hear music or message on hold if configured on your system. 4. If the phone has been fitted with the SPA500S Attendant Console and the system has been configured in Key System Mode users will see shared park appearances on that console. A park retrieval code of 7001 relates to the first shared park appearance button, 7002 relates to the second etc. 5. Dial the retrieval code e.g to retrieve the call. 6. Alternatively if the phone has been fitted with an Attendant Console press the relevant shared park appearance button to retrieve the parked call. 7. If the call remains parked for longer than the system timeout (see On-Hold Options in the Portal Advanced Settings Admin users only) the call will ring back on the originating extension. Edition Eleven Page 144 of 289

145 14. Cisco Phones SPA525G2 (contd) o). Speed Dials You can create speed dials assigned to a number, that, when pressed on the keypad, dials the number assigned to it. You can have up to 8 speed dials (2 9). Location 1 is reserved. 1. Press (setup button) 2. Scroll to Speed Dials and press the Select soft key. 3. For a new speed dial, scroll to select an unused speed dial location (2 through 9). 4. To edit an existing speed dial, select it. 5. Press the Edit soft key. 6. Enter the name and phone number for the speed dial. 7. To select a contact from the Address Book, press Option and then Select to Select From Address Book. Scroll to choose the contact and press Select. 8. Press Save. To call one of your configured speed dial numbers, choose one of the following options: Open a phone line and press the number for the speed dial (2 9), then wait a few seconds or press the Dial soft key. Press (setup button) select Speed Dial, choose the number, and press the Dial soft key. (Note) if your phone has been fitted with an attendant console(s) use the Star2Star Web Portal Individual Phone Settings / Speed Dials section to configure this device. Typically you would add local extensions to view their presence and allow one touch transfer of calls from your phone to that extension. p). Attendant Console (Expansion Modules) The following Star2Star Cisco SPA Phones can be fitted with the Cisco SPA500S Attendant Console(s) also sometimes know as an Expansion Module. See Section 11. Cisco Phones (SPA5xxG Series Attendant Console) for more details on configuring using the Star2Star Web Portal. Compatible Phones Attendant Console Unit Description Features Cisco SPA502G Cisco SPA504G Cisco SPA508G Cisco SPA509G Cisco SPA525G2 The unit is self powered and has 32 programmable multicolored LED buttons. Up to 2 units can be fitted to a single phone. Use the Star2Star web portal Speed Dial option to configure your attendant console(s). Commonly used numbers can be added either from the system Application-Dial External Numbers or custom numbers and labels. You can also add extensions and monitor the presence of a local extension. Generally you would monitor an extension on its Line 1 appearance. This is where all calls arrive by default. The Cisco SPA500S module supports One Touch Transfer and call pickup. (Note) When monitoring extensions the lamp will only light when the extension is actually connected to a call or ringing with a new call. (Note) When fitted to the SPA525G2 shared park appearance positions will be displayed. Edition Eleven Page 145 of 289

146 14. Cisco Phones SPA525G2 (contd) q). Advanced Features (Bluetooth) The Cisco SPA525G2 supports Bluetooth to allow use of the phone with a wireless Bluetooth-enabled headset and/or a Bluetooth-enabled mobile phone. You can do the following: Pair a wireless Bluetooth-enabled headset and Cisco SPA525G2. Pair your Bluetooth-enabled mobile phone and Cisco SPA525G2. Your mobile phone is assigned a line button on your phone. You can make and receive mobile calls using the Cisco SPA525G2. Switch audio for in-progress calls between your mobile phone and the Cisco SPA525G2. Import your mobile phone address book to your Cisco SPA525G2 personal address book (up to 300 contacts). Use your Cisco SPA525G2 as a handsfree device for your mobile phone. (Note) Not all mobile phones support this function. If you have both a headset and a Bluetooth-enabled phone paired with your Cisco SPA525G2, the phone can only connect to one device at a time. If multiple Bluetooth devices are in range of your phone, the order of devices in the Bluetooth Profiles list is used, and the device with a higher priority is activated first. Click the arrow keys to move devices up and down in priority. You can choose yes or no under Connect Automatically to determine if the phone connects automatically if it detects the Bluetooth device. You can also remove devices in this window. Enabling Bluetooth on Your Phone: 1. Press (setup button) to enter the Settings menu. 2. Scroll to User Preferences and press Select. 3. Scroll to Bluetooth Configuration and press Select. 4. With Bluetooth selected, press the Right Arrow key until a blue check mark appears. 5. Press Save. Edition Eleven Page 146 of 289

147 14. Cisco Phones SPA525G2 (contd) q). Advanced Features (Bluetooth Mobile Phone) (contd) Pairing Your Cisco SPA 525G2 with a Bluetooth-Enabled Mobile Phone: To pair your Cisco SPA525G2 with your Bluetooth-enabled mobile phone, you can either initiate pairing from the Cisco SPA525G2, or from your mobile phone. Initiating Pairing from the Cisco SPA 525G2: 1. Enabled Bluetooth as described previously. 2. Press (setup button) to enter the Settings menu. 3. Scroll to User Preferences and press Select. 4. Scroll to Bluetooth Configuration and press Select. 5. Scroll to Bluetooth Mode and press the Right Arrow key to choose one of the following: a. Handsfree Your Cisco SPA525G2 will operate as a handsfree device with a Bluetooth-enabled mobile phone. The bottom line appearance button will reconfigure displaying a mobile phone icon. b. Both Your Cisco SPA525G2 will operate with your Bluetooth-enabled mobile phone or operate with a Bluetooth headset. 6. Your phone will reconfigure itself Refreshing Voice Component will be displayed temporarily as this process completes. (Note) Your Cisco SPA 525G2 will connect to only one device at a time (either the Bluetooth headset or the Bluetooth-enabled mobile phone.) If multiple Bluetooth devices are in range of the Cisco SPA525G2, the order of devices in the Bluetooth Configuration > Bluetooth Profiles list is used, and the device with a higher priority is activated first. 7. Scroll to Bluetooth Profiles and press the Right Arrow key to enter the profile screen. 8. Make sure your mobile phone is in Listen mode. This mode is selected so that other devices can find it. Refer to your Bluetooth enabled Mobile Phone instructions for details on this process. 9. Press Scan to scan for your mobile phone. (Note) Depending on the network environment (for example, the number of Bluetooth devices and noise level), your Bluetooth headset may not appear on the found devices list. Ensure the headset is powered on and has Bluetooth activated, and retry the scan. 10. In the Select a Bluetooth Device to Pair list, select the mobile phone to which you want to pair and press Connect. 11. The Cisco SPA525G2 will display Connecting Bluetooth Device. 12. A prompt for a passcode will appear in your mobile phone display to complete the Pairing process. That passcode is usually 4 zeroes e.g If the pairing process is successful the last line appearance button on your Cisco SPA525G2 phone will be green and a mobile phone icon with a flashing lightning bolt icon is displayed next to the mobile phone name, number, or other identifier (such as the phone model) for your phone (see image below). Edition Eleven Page 147 of 289

148 14. Cisco Phones SPA525G2 (contd) q). Advanced Features (Bluetooth Mobile Phone) (contd) 14. When your mobile phone is no longer paired (Bluetooth deactivated or mobile phone out of range) your Cisco SPA525G2 display will change. The line appearance button will be orange (see image below). (Note) When your Bluetooth enabled Mobile Phone is successfully paired with the Cisco SPA525G2 the name, number, or other identifier shown in the display depends on what is configured on your mobile phone. If you have not configured a name on your phone, the phone may display your phone number or some other identifier (such as the phone model). The display name can vary depending on your phone model and configuration. 15. To verify the mobile phone configuration. 16. Press (setup button) to enter the Settings menu. 17. Scroll to User Preferences and press Select. 18. Scroll to Bluetooth Configuration and press Select. 19. Scroll to Bluetooth Profiles and press the Right Arrow key to enter the profile screen. 20. Your mobile phone should appear in the list of Bluetooth devices. Importing Your Mobile Phone Address Book into the Cisco SPA525G2: 1. Press (setup button) to enter the Settings menu and select Directories or press the Directory soft key. 2. Select Personal Address Book. Edition Eleven Page 148 of 289

149 14. Cisco Phones SPA525G2 (contd) 3. Press the Import soft key. (Note) Depending on your mobile phone, you may need to authorize the Bluetooth connection, even if the phone is already paired with the Cisco SPA525G2. q). Advanced Features (Bluetooth Mobile Phone) (contd) 4. The phone displays a status message about the import. 5. The download time will vary based upon the number of entries in your mobile phone (300 maximum). 6. If the import process is successful, your imported contacts are shown in the Directory. Edition Eleven Page 149 of 289

150 Making a Mobile Phone Call Using Your Cisco SPA525G2: When you make a mobile phone call using your Cisco SPA525G2, your Cisco SPA 525G2 acts as a handsfree device for your phone. The call is made through your mobile phone, but the audio is present on the Cisco SPA525G2 and the call control is done using the Cisco SPA525G2, unless you switch back to your mobile phone. 1. Press the line button associated with your mobile phone (the line button is marked with a mobile phone icon with a flashing lightning bolt). 2. Enter a number to dial and press the Dial softkey. 3. Alternatively press the Directory softkey and select Personal Address book. Choose a number and press the Dial softkey. 4. The outgoing call appears on both your Cisco SPA 525G2 and your mobile phone display. The Cisco SPA 525G2 displays an off-hook icon next to the mobile phone display name. Edition Eleven Page 150 of 289

151 14. Cisco Phones SPA525G2 (contd) q). Advanced Features (Bluetooth Mobile Phone) (contd) 5. After the call is connected, the icon next to the mobile phone display shows that the call is established. The audio goes through the Cisco SPA525G2, although the mobile phone display also shows a connected call. 6. To switch audio from your Cisco SPA525G2 phone press the soft key below the mobile phone icon. Press the soft key again to switch audio back to the Cisco SPA525G2 (see image below). (Note) Not all mobile phones support this function. 7. When a mobile phone call is incoming, outgoing, or connected on your Cisco SPA525G2, the display shows information about your mobile phone. (Note) Not all mobile phones support this function. The call display bubble shows the following information: Battery indicator Shows the battery life left on your mobile phone. Signal strength Shows the signal strength for your mobile phone. Network (optional) May show the phone network for your mobile phone. Receiving Mobile Phone Calls Using Your Cisco SPA525G2: If your mobile phone is paired with the Cisco SPA525G2, an incoming call to your mobile phone is also displayed on the Cisco SPA525G2. 1. To answer a call press the Answer softkey, red flashing line button associated with your mobile phone, pick up the handset or press (speaker button). 2. Press Ignore to ignore the call. The caller will be directed to your mobile voic . Edition Eleven Page 151 of 289

152 14. Cisco Phones SPA525G2 (contd) q). Advanced Features (Bluetooth - Headset) (contd) Connecting Bluetooth Headsets: To configure the phone to work with your Bluetooth headset, first enable Bluetooth on the Cisco SPA525G2 phone as described earlier: Initiating Pairing With Your Bluetooth Headset: 1. Press (setup button) to enter the Settings menu. 2. Scroll to User Preferences and press Select. 3. Scroll to Bluetooth Configuration and press Select. 4. Scroll to Bluetooth Mode and press the Right Arrow key to choose one of the following: a. Handsfree Your Cisco SPA525G2 will operate as a handsfree device with a Bluetooth-enabled mobile phone. The bottom line appearance button will reconfigure displaying a mobile phone icon. b. Both Your Cisco SPA525G2 will operate with your Bluetooth-enabled mobile phone or operate with a Bluetooth headset. 5. Your phone will reconfigure itself Refreshing Voice Component will be displayed temporarily as this process completes. (Note) Your Cisco SPA 525G2 will connect to only one device at a time (either the Bluetooth headset or the Bluetooth-enabled mobile phone.) If multiple Bluetooth devices are in range of the Cisco SPA525G2, the order of devices in the Bluetooth Configuration > Bluetooth Profiles list is used, and the device with a higher priority is activated first. 6. Scroll to Bluetooth Profiles and press the Right Arrow key to enter the profile screen. 7. Make sure your headset is in Listen mode. This mode is required so that other devices can find it. Refer to your Bluetooth headset instructions for details on this process. 8. Press Scan to scan for your headset. (Note) Depending on the network environment (for example, the number of Bluetooth devices and noise level), your Bluetooth headset may not appear on the found devices list. Ensure the headset is powered on and has Bluetooth activated, and retry the scan. 9. In the Select a Bluetooth Device to Pair list, select the headset you want to pair and press Connect. 10. The Cisco SPA525G2 will display Connecting Bluetooth Device. 11. The Bluetooth Profile screen will appear. 12. Navigate to the Pin field and enter the appropriate Pin usually 4 zeroes e.g to complete the Pairing process. Edition Eleven Page 152 of 289

153 14. Cisco Phones SPA525G2 (contd) q). Advanced Features (Charging Your Mobile Phone) Charging Your Mobile Phone Using Your Cisco SPA525G2: You can use the USB port on the Cisco SPA525G2 model to charge your Bluetooth-enabled mobile phone if your phone has a mini-usb port. e.g. BlackBerry, iphone. n). Advanced Features (Playing MP3 Files on Your Phone) Your phone contains an audio player that can play.mp3 files (playlist limited to 48 songs). To play music on your phone, you must load the audio files onto a USB memory device (not sold with the phone). The phone reads the files from the device, so the device must remain inserted while playing the files. (Note) Only MP3 music with no Digital Media Rights protection can be played on the Cisco SPA525G2 IP Phone. Creating the Playlist: 1. Connect a USB storage device to your PC. 2. Create a directory named mp3 on the USB device and copy the audio files into that directory. 3. Remove the USB device from your PC and insert it into the USB slot on the Cisco SPA525G2. 4. Press (setup button) to enter the Settings menu. 5. Scroll to MP3 Player and press Select. 6. Press Add List to create a playlist from the songs on the USB device. 7. Choose songs by choosing one of the following methods: Choose individual songs by scrolling to the song you want and pressing the Right Arrow key or the Select button. Choose all songs on the USB device by pressing SelectAll. You can clear all selected songs by pressing ClearAll. 8. After choosing songs, the songs will be marked with a check in the box next to the song. Press Add to add the selected songs to the playlist. Edition Eleven Page 153 of 289

154 14. Cisco Phones SPA525G2 (contd) q). Advanced Features (Playing MP3 Files on Your Phone) (contd) Playing Songs: 1. In the Playlist, scroll to the song you want to begin playing and press Play. 2. You have the following controls: Stop Stop the song. Pressing play will restart song play. Previous Move to the previous song in the playlist. Next Move to the next song in the playlist. Back Move back one screen to the playlist. Controlling the Audio: 1. Use the Volume button on the phone to turn the music up or down. To switch the audio destination between the speaker, headset, and handset, press the Up Arrow or Down Arrow key. The icon on the left above the song length display shows the audio destination of speaker, handset, or headset (see the following graphic). Edition Eleven Page 154 of 289

155 15. Cisco Phones (SPA50xG Series and SPA303G) a). Answering a Call Using the Handset: 1. Pick up the handset. Using the Speakerphone: 1. Press, answer soft key or (red flashing line button-not SPA502G). Using the optional Headset: 1. Press to answer the call using a headset. b). Making a Call Using the Handset: 1. Pick up the handset and dial the desired number. 2. Press the dial soft key to complete the call. Using the hands-free Speakerphone: 1. With the handset on-hook, either press (speaker button), or (a line button-not SPA502G). Dial the desired number. 2. Press the dial soft key to complete the call. Using the optional Headset: 1. With the headset connected, press (headset button), or (a line button-not SPA502G). Dial the desired number. 2. Press the dial soft key to complete the call. Handling multiple calls: 1. With a call in progress the next call to the phone will be indicated by a change in the phones display screen indicating that a call is waiting and showing caller information for the call. The user will also hear a short call waiting tone to indicate another call is present. The line button and indicator at the top of the phone will flash red-(not SPA502G). Select the answer soft key or flashing line button (not SPA502G) to answer the call. 2. Your original caller is automatically placed on hold and the display information for the call will appear on screen. 3. Press the blinking line button (not SPA502G). to toggle between calls. 4. If you receive additional calls the caller will be connected to your voic or follow the path of Find-Me / Follow-Me if configured for your phone. (Note) During a call, you can alternate between handset, headset, or hands-free modes by pressing the or buttons. Edition Eleven Page 155 of 289

156 15. Cisco Phones SPA50xG Series and SPA 303G (contd) Redial: 1. Press the redial soft key and use the navigation arrows to select the desired number from the Place Call list. 2. Lift the handset or press the dial soft key. 3. Select the edit soft key to edit the number selected before dialing e.g. to add an area code. Call History: 1. To access a list of Redial, Answered Calls and Missed Calls press. 2. Use the Navigation button (down arrow) to scroll to Option 2 Call History. Press the Select soft key. 3. Use the Navigation button (down/up arrow) to scroll to the required option. 4. Use the Navigation button (down/up arrow) again to scroll to the required entry. 5. Press the dial soft key to call the number displayed. 6. Select the edit soft key to edit the number selected before dialing e.g. to add an area code. 7. Select the delete soft key to delete a call history entry. 8. Select the cancel soft key to go back a screen. Outgoing CallerID: 1. Your phone can be configured to display the Outgoing CallerID of your main number (default setting) or any other number that is configured on your system. 2. The CallerID can also be set to Blocked. 3. System Administration access is required to change these settings. 4. A typical setup could be to display the main company CallerID on the first line appearance and another ID or Blocked for subsequent line appearances. 5. To use this feature, once configured, select the relevant line button 1 5 to make your call. 6. Your Outgoing CallerID will reflect what s set in the Star2Star Web Portal. c). Microphone Mute 1. To mute the phone microphone, speaker, or headset microphone press. The button will glow red. 2. The other party cannot hear you. 3. Press (microphone mute button) again to unmute and resume audio. d). Holding a Call 1. During a call either press the Hold soft key or hold button to place the call on hold. 2. The line button flashes red. 3. The caller on hold will hear Music or Message on hold if enabled on your system. 4. Press the Resume soft key or flashing red line button to re establish the call. Edition Eleven Page 156 of 289

157 15. Cisco Phones SPA50xG Series and SPA 303G (contd) e). Transferring a Call Blind Transfer (Transfer without announcement): 1. During a call, press (right arrow) then press the BlindXfer soft key. 2. The caller on hold will hear Music or Message on hold if enabled on your system. 3. Dial the number you want to transfer the call to then press the Dial soft key to complete the transfer. 4. Alternatively during a call press the Transfer soft key, dial the number you require then press the Dial soft key followed by the Transfer soft key to complete the transfer. Transfer (Announced): 1. During a call, press the Transfer soft key. 2. The caller on hold will hear Music or Message on hold if enabled on your system. 3. Dial the number you want to transfer the call to and then press the Dial soft key. 4. When the called party answers announce the call. 5. Press the Transfer soft key to complete the transfer. f). Ending a Call 1. Press the End Call soft key or replace the handset. 2. Press (line button) if you are using the Speakerphone, headset or handset. 3. Alternatively you may also press (headset button) if you are using a headset. g). Creating a 3 Party Conference Call To create a three-way local conference call: 1. You can create a conference with two other parties using the phones local conferencing feature. 2. During an active call, press (right arrow) then press the Conf soft key to create a new call. 3. The active call is placed on hold and the caller will hear Music or Message on hold if enabled on your system. 4. Dial the phone number of the second party 5. When the second party answers, press the Conf soft key again to join all parties in the Conference. When you hang up, the other two parties are disconnected. To keep the other parties in a call, but disconnect you from the call, press the Join soft key. Use the Star2Star Conference room feature for larger conferences. h). Volume Controls 1. Press the volume button to adjust handset, headset and speakerphone volume during a call. 2. Pressing this button with the phone in an idle state will adjust the ringer volume. 3. Press the Save soft key to keep the setting. Edition Eleven Page 157 of 289

158 15. Cisco Phones SPA50xG Series and SPA 303G (contd) i). Missed Call Display Returning a Missed Call: 1. If the LCD screen shows a missed call, press the Call Rtn soft key to return the call. (Note) if the phone display shows multiple missed calls pressing the Call Rtn soft key will return the last missed call. 2. Press the Miss soft key to display a list of Missed Calls. 3. Use the Navigation button (down/up arrow) to scroll to the required entry. 4. Press the Dial soft key to call the number displayed. 5. Select the EditDial soft key to edit the number selected before dialing e.g. to add an area code. 6. You may also select the Option soft key for the following options: a. Delete Entry (Deletes a specific call history entry) b. Delete List (Deletes all entries for a specific call history list) c. Add to Address Book (Add the call detail to your personal address book) 7. If the LCD screen does not show a missed call, you can return a call from the Missed Call list. 8. To access a list of Missed Calls press to access Call History. 9. Use the Navigation button (down arrow) to scroll to Option 2 Call History. Press the Select soft key. 10. Use the Navigation button (down/up arrow) to scroll to Option 2 Missed Calls. Press the Select soft key. 11. Use the Navigation button (down/up arrow) again to scroll to the required entry. 12. Use the Dial soft key call the number displayed. 13. Select the EditDial soft key to edit the number selected before dialing e.g. to add an area code. 14. (Note) step 6 above also applies. j). Do Not Disturb 1. Press DND soft key. 2. A Do Not Disturb message will appear in the phone display. 3. Press the Clr DND soft key to turn off the feature. (Note) callers will be directed to Voice Mail or the Star2Star Find-Me / Follow- Me feature if invoked. k). Changing Ringtones 1. Press (setup button) to enter the Settings Menu. 2. Scroll to User Preferences and press Select. 3. Scroll to 2 Audio Preferences and press the Select soft key. 4. Scroll to the extension you wish to change. Typically all calls will arrive on Ext Press the right arrow navigation button to view and subsequently scroll the available ring tone options. 6. Press the Play soft key to listen. 7. When you have selected the tone you require press the Select soft key. 8. Press the Back soft key twice followed by the Exit soft key to return to the idle phone display. (Note) you may upload 2 custom mp3 ring tones. Edition Eleven Page 158 of 289

159 15. Cisco Phones SPA50xG Series and SPA 303G (contd) l). Voic Access 1. The indicator at the top of the phone will glow red when new message are waiting. A message envelop icon will appear against your extension number in the phone display. 2. To listen to voice messages press the button or dial The system will prompt for your password. (Note) as a new user accessing your mailbox for the first time, your password will be the same as your extension number. You will be guided through a short setup process including a password change. Set a password that is different to the extension number. See section Setting up your Voic . m). Directory The Company Extension Directory is automatically downloaded to the phone. 1. To access the Directory press (setup button). 2. Use the navigation arrows to select option 1 Directories. Press the Select soft key. 3. The phone will display 2 options: - Personal Address Book You can add up to 300 entries into the phone directly. Each entry contains a number of fields i.e. Name / Work No / Mobile No / Home No / Ring Tone. (Note) you can also import contacts directly from a Bluetooth enabled mobile phone. View the Star2Star Phone and Features Guide for details on this feature. - Directory The corporate extension directory is automatically downloaded to the phone. The phone will display 32 entries at a time. Press the Next soft key to display additional entries as required. 4. Using the navigation arrows select the directory you require and press the Select soft key. 5. Use the navigation arrows to select the entry you require. 6. Press the Option soft key (Personal Address Book only) to use the Search feature to locate a specific entry. 7. Press the Dial soft key to dial the entry you require. n). Call Park 1. To park a call on a local phone (non remote) and retrieve from a different local phone, with a call in progress press the park soft key. 2. The phone will announce the system retrieval code e.g and automatically park the call. 3. The caller will hear music or message on hold if configured on your system. 4. Cisco SPA508G and SPA509G phone users will see the parked call in 1 of four shared park appearances displayed on the phone if the system is configured in Key System Mode. A park retrieval code of 7001 relates to the first shared park appearance button, 7002 relates to the second etc. Non 508G / 509G users will see shared park appearances if the phone is fitted with the SPA500S Attendant Console. (Note) not available on the 303 model. 5. To retrieve a parked call on the 508G / 509G or another model with an Attendant Console fitted, press the relevant shared park appearance button. 6. Alternatively dial the retrieval code e.g to retrieve the call. 7. If the call remains parked for longer than the system timeout (see On-Hold Options in the Portal Advanced Settings Admin users only) the call will ring back on the originating extension. Edition Eleven Page 159 of 289

160 15. Cisco Phones SPA50xG Series and SPA 303G (contd) o). Speed Dials You can create speed dials assigned to a number, that, when pressed on the keypad, dials the number assigned to it. You can have up to 8 of these (2 9) speed dials. Location 1 is reserved for voice mail). 1. Press (setup button) 2. Scroll to Speed Dial and press the select soft key. 3. For a new speed dial, scroll to select an unused speed dial location (2 through 9). 4. To edit an existing speed dial or add a new one select it by using the navigation buttons then press the edit soft key. 6. Enter the phone number for the speed dial and select the ok soft key. To call one of your configured speed dial numbers, choose one of the following options: Open a phone line and press the number for the speed dial (2 9), then wait a few seconds or press the dial soft key. Press (setup button) select Speed Dial, choose the number, and press the dial soft key. (Note) if your phone has been fitted with an attendant console(s) use the Star2Star Web Portal Individual Phone Settings / Speed Dials section to configure this device. Typically you would add local extensions to view their presence and allow one touch transfer of calls from your phone to that extension. p). Attendant Console (Expansion Modules) The following Star2Star Cisco SPA Phones can be fitted with the Cisco SPA500S Attendant Console(s) also sometimes know as an Expansion Module. See Section 11. Cisco Phones (SPA5xxG Attendant Console) for more details on configuring using the Star2Star Web Portal. (Note) not available for the SPA303. Compatible Phones Attendant Console Unit Description Features Cisco SPA502G Cisco SPA504G Cisco SPA508G Cisco SPA509G Cisco SPA525G2 The unit is self powered and has 32 programmable multicolored LED buttons. Up to 2 units can be fitted to a single phone. Use the Star2Star web portal Speed Dial option to configure your attendant console(s). Commonly used numbers can be added either from the system Application-Dial External Numbers or custom numbers and labels. You can also add extensions and monitor the presence of a local extension. Generally you would monitor an extension on its Line 1 appearance. This is where all calls arrive by default. The Cisco SPA500S module supports One Touch Transfer and call pickup. (Note) When monitoring extensions the lamp will only light when the extension is actually connected to a call or ringing with a new call. (Note) When fitted to the Cisco SPA502G/504G shared park appearance positions will be displayed. Edition Eleven Page 160 of 289

161 16. Cisco Phones Configuring the SPA500S Attendant Console(s) Description This feature allows the user to add / manage individual speed dial numbers for their phone using the Cisco SPA500S Attendant Console(s). Up to 2 modules can be fitted without additional power to a compatible phone i.e. Cisco SPA502G, Cisco SPA504G, Cisco SPA508G, Cisco SPA509G and the Cisco SPA525G2. Items that appear in the Destinations list can be selected. You can also select local extensions to manage their presence and use additional features i.e. One Touch Transfer / Call Pickup. This option also provides the ability to add custom numbers and labels for easy identification i.e. those not in Applications as Dial External Numbers. The number of available speed dials will change if a user has more than one expansion key module associated with the phone. (Note) When fitted to the Cisco SPA502G/504G/525G2 shared park appearance positions will be displayed when the system is configured in Key System Mode. The system will automatically reserve the first 4 positions by default. The number of modules can be set in Basic Settings under the P H O N E S Y S T E M C O N F I G U R A T I O N Menu. Select the Extensions link (Administrator Only). Setup 1. Select the Speed Dials option under I N D I V I D U A L P H O N E S E T T I N G S to configure the attendant console. 2. Remember to Save Changes to PBX and reboot the phone. To reboot the phone unplug the internet cable momentarily. The phone will restart. (Note) if the phone has a separate power cable connected, momentarily unplug that cable to reboot the phone. Edition Eleven Page 161 of 289

162 16. Cisco Phones (SPA5xxG Series Attendant Console(s)) (contd) 3. The following examples show configuration of the Speed Dial feature using the Cisco SPA500S Attendant Console with either the Cisco SPA502G, SPA504G, SPA508G, SPA509G and SPA525G2 phones. Cisco SPA502G, SPA504G and SPA525G2 Attendant Console with the system in Key System Mode Cisco SPA509G with an Attendant Console. The system is operating in Key System Mode. (Note) the additional Speed Dials 1 4 that are reserved for Park Positions on the phone itself. Speed Dials 5 8 are also on the phone and available for use. The Cisco SPA500S Attendant Console has 32 programmable multicolored LED buttons available. All 64 buttons can be programmed via the Speed Dials option if both modules are fitted. (Note) Positions 1 4 are reserved for Park Positions on a Cisco SPA502G, SPA504G and SPA525G2 phone if your system is in Key System Mode which allows users to park calls in shared park positions. Both the Cisco SPA508G and SPA509G have 4 Park Positions available on the phone. Therefore the first 4 Positions on an Expansion Module are available for use via the Star2Star Web Portal. Select the speed dial # using the drop down bar. Make your selection from the available options. You may also enter a Custom Number with label. This option is located at the bottom of the drop down list. Cisco SPA509G with Attendant Console fitted. Multicolored LED buttons show green when a monitored extension is idle. Solid red when busy. Flashing red when ringing. Edition Eleven Page 162 of 289

163 a). Answering a Call 17. Cisco Phones (7940 / 7960 Series) Using the Handset: 5. Pick up the handset. Using Hands-Free Speakerphone Mode: 6. Press, Answer soft key or (the line button for the incoming call). Using the (optional) Headset: 7. Press if unlit to answer the call using a headset. 8. Or if is already lit, press the Answer soft key or (the line button for the incoming call). Handling multiple calls: 9. With a call in progress the next call to the phone will be indicated by a change in the phones display screen indicating that a call is waiting and showing caller information for the call. The user will also hear a short call waiting tone to indicate another call is present. Select the Answer soft key to answer the call. 10. Your original caller is automatically placed on hold and the display information for the call will flash on screen. 11. If you receive additional calls the caller will be connected to your voic or follow the path of Find-Me / Follow-Me if configured for your phone. b). Making a Call Using the handset: 1. Pick up the handset and dial the desired number. If the number is less than 10 digits please press the Dial soft key to complete the call. Using Hands Free Speaker Phone Mode: 2. With the handset on-hook, either press the New Call soft key,, or (a line button). Dial the desired number. 3. If the number is less than 10 digits please press the Dial soft key to complete the call. Using the (optional) Headset: 4. With the headset connected, press, the New Call soft key, or (a line button). Dial the desired number. 5. If the number is less than 10 digits please press the Dial soft key to complete the call. Edition Eleven Page 163 of 289

164 17. Cisco Phones (contd) Redial Last Number: 1. To redial the last number dialed press the Redial soft key. Call Lists: 9. To access a list of Missed Calls, Received Calls, or Placed Calls press. 10. Use the Navigation button to scroll to the required list. Press the Select soft key. 11. Use the Navigation button again to scroll to the required entry. 12. Press the Dial soft key to call the number displayed. Outgoing CallerID: 7. Your phone can be configured to display the Outgoing CallerID of your main number (default setting) or any other number that is configured on your system. 8. The CallerID can also be set to Blocked. 9. System Administration access is required to change these settings. 10. A typical setup could be to display the main company CallerID on the first line appearance and another ID or Blocked for subsequent line appearances. 11. To use this feature, once configured, select the relevant line button to make your call (Note) The number of available line appearances is phone type dependant. 12. Your Outgoing CallerID will reflect what s set in the Star2Star Web Portal. c). Microphone Mute 1. During a call press. The indicator will glow red. 2. The other party cannot hear you. 3. Press again to resume audio. 4. This feature will work when using handset, headset or speakerphone. d). Holding a Call 1. During a call press the Hold soft key to place the call on hold. 2. The call information will flash on screen and Hold will be indicated on the display. 3. The caller on hold will hear Music or Message on hold if enabled on your system. 4. Press the Resume soft key to re establish the call. 5. If two calls are placed on hold, use the Navigation button to select the desired call, and then press the Resume soft key to return to this call. Edition Eleven Page 164 of 289

165 17. Cisco Phones (contd) e). Transferring a Call Blind Transfer (Transfer the call to another party without any announcement): 1. During a call, press the more soft key. The caller on hold will hear Music or Message on hold if enabled on your system. 2. Press the BlndXfr soft key. Dial the number you want to transfer the call to then press the Dial soft key to complete the transfer. Alternatively you may press to access a list of Missed Calls, Received Calls, or Placed Calls. 3. Use the Navigation button to scroll to the required list. Press the Select soft key. 4. Use the Navigation button again to scroll to the required entry. 5. Press the Dial soft key to call the number displayed and complete the transfer. Transfer (Announced): 6. During a call, press the more soft key. The caller on hold will hear Music or Message on hold if enabled on your system. 7. Press the Trnsfer soft key. Enter the number you require. 8. Press the Dial soft key to complete the call. 9. Alternatively you may press to access a list of Missed Calls, Received Calls, or Placed Calls. 10. Use the Navigation button to scroll to the required list. Press the Select soft key. 11. Use the Navigation button again to scroll to the required entry. 12. Press the Dial soft key to call the number displayed. 13. When the called party answers announce the call. 14. Press the Trnsfer soft key to complete the transfer. f). Ending a Call 1. Press the EndCall soft key or replace the handset. 2. Press if you are using the Speakerphone. 3. Press if you are using a headset. Press the EndCall soft key if you wish to keep headset mode activated (keep the button lit after hanging up). Edition Eleven Page 165 of 289

166 17. Cisco Phones (contd) g). Creating a 3 Party Conference Call 1. You can create a conference with two other parties using the phones local conferencing feature. 2. With an incoming call on your phone or a call you have made, press the Confrn soft key to create a new call. 3. The active call is placed on hold and the caller will hear Music or Message on hold if enabled on your system. 4. Dial the phone number of the second party or press to access your call lists. From one of these lists press the Dial soft key. 5. When the second party answers, press the Join soft key again to join all parties in the Conference. h). Volume Controls 1. Press the volume keys to adjust handset, headset and speakerphone volume during a call. 2. Pressing these keys in an idle state will adjust the ringer volume. 3. Your settings will be retained unless the phone is powered off. i). Missed Call Display 1. To view missed calls and clear the missed call display on your phone press to access the directory. Press the Select soft key for option 1 Missed Calls. 2. Use the Navigation Button to view all missed calls. 3. Press the Dial soft key to return the call. 4. The most recent will be at position 1 in the list. j). Do Not Disturb 1. Press to enter the Settings Menu. 2. Use the Navigation Button to select option 6 Call Preferences. Press the Select soft key. 3. Select option 1 Do Not Disturb. 4. Press the Yes soft key followed by the Save soft key to turn on the DND feature for your phone. 5. Press the Back soft key to return to normal phone display. 6. Do Not Disturb is displayed on your phone. 7. Callers will hear your voic or follow the path of Find-Me / Follow-Me if configured on your system. Edition Eleven Page 166 of 289

167 17. Cisco Phones (contd) k). Changing Ringtones 1. Press to enter the Settings Menu. 2. Use the Navigation Button to select option 2 Ring Type. Press the Select soft key. 3. Use the Navigation Button to scroll through available ring types. 4. Press Play to hear the selected ring type. 5. When you find a ring sound that you want, press Select, then press OK. l). Voic Access 1. When you receive a message on your phone the red light on your handset will glow to indicate that a new message(s) is waiting. A flashing envelop icon will appear on your phone display. 2. When you lift the handset Stuttering Dial Tone is played. 3. To listen to voice messages press the button or dial The system will prompt for your password. (Note) as a new user accessing your mailbox for the first time, your password will be the same as your extension number. You will be guided through a short setup process including a password change. Set a password that is different to the extension number. See section Setting up your Voic . m). Directory 1. The company extension directory is automatically downloaded to the phone. The system will also retain details of Missed, Received and Placed Calls. 2. To access the Directory press 3. Use the Use the Navigation Button to select the option you require e.g. 5. External Directory. 4. Use the Navigation Button to select an entry or your keypad to enter the first character of a name. 5. Press the Dial soft key to dial the entry you require. n). Call Park 1. To park a call and retrieve from a different phone perform an attended (Announced) transfer to a. See section Transferring a Call 2. The system will play back a retrieval code ( ). a. The system provides up to 99 park positions 3. When the caller is Parked they will hear Message / Music on hold if enabled on your system. 4. To retrieve the call, dial the retrieval code to reconnect to the call. 5. If the call remains parked for longer than the system timeout (see On-Hold Options in the Portal Advanced Settings) the call will ring back on the originating extension. Edition Eleven Page 167 of 289

168 18. Yealink SIP-T20P Telephone a). Making a Call Using the handset:. Pick up the handset.. Enter the desired number using the keypad.. Press or. By default, the # key is set as a send key. You may also set the * key as a send key or set neither of them as send keys. Using the speakerphone: 1. With the handset on-hook, press or the line key to obtain a dial tone. 2. Enter the desired number, then press or. Or 1. With the handset on-hook, enter the desired number using the keypad. 2. Press, or. Placing a call using the headset: 1. With the optional headset connected, press to activate the headset mode. 2. Press the line key to obtain a dial tone. 3. Enter the desired number using the keypad. 4. Press,. Edition Eleven Page 168 of 289

169 With the optional headset connected: 1. Press to activate the headset mode. 2. Enter the desired number using the keypad. 3. Press or. Placing Multiple Calls: 1. To place a new call during an active call, press the line key. The active call is placed on hold. 2. Enter the desired number using the key pad. 3. Press, or. You may press or to switch between the calls, then press again to resume the desired call. Redialing a call: Press to enter the Dialed Calls list. Press or to select the desired call, then press or. Press twice when the phone is idle to call the last dialed number. b). Answering a Call To answer a call using the handset: Pick up the handset. To answer a call using the hands-free speakerphone mode: 1. Press. 2. With the handset on-hook and headset mode deactivated, press. 3. With the handset on-hook and headset mode deactivated, press the line key (the line key LED flashes green). Edition Eleven Page 169 of 289

170 To answer a call using the headset: Do one of the following: 1. Press. 2. With the headset mode activated, press. 3. With the headset mode activated, press the line key (the line key LED flashes green). Answering When in Another Call: If you have an active call and an incoming call arrives on the phone, do one of the following: Press. The incoming call is answered and the original call is placed on hold. Or 1. Press to access the new call. 2. Press. The incoming call is answered and the original call is placed on hold. Note: You may ignore incoming calls by pressing the Reject soft key or the Silence soft key. Ending a call: Do one of the following: If you are using the handset, hang up the handset or press. If you are using a headset, press. If you are using the speakerphone, press or. Note: To end a call placed on hold, you may press the HOLD key to resume the call before ending it. Muting a call: Press during an active call. The phone LCD screen indicates the call is on mute. Press again to un-mute the call. Edition Eleven Page 170 of 289

171 c). Placing a call on Hold Press green. during a call. The phone LCD screen will show the call on hold and the line key LED will flash Note: The phone will beep softly every 30 seconds as a reminder there is a call on hold. Resuming a call on hold: Press again. Multiple calls on hold: If multiple calls are placed on hold, press or to switch between the calls, then press to retrieve the desired call. If more than two calls are on hold, an indication appears on the LCD screen, for example 1/3, indicating that this is the first call out of three calls. If multiple calls are on hold on more than one line key, you can view the details of the calls by pressing the corresponding line key and then press to retrieve the call. d). Do Not Disturb You can enable or disable the Do Not Disturb (DND) mode on the phone. If DND mode is enabled, the phone will reject all incoming calls automatically and the callers will hear a busy signal or a message, depending on how your system administrator set up the configuration server. To activate the DND mode on the SIP-T20P IP phone: 1. Press. 2. Select Features > DND. 3. Select Enable from the DND field. 4. (Optional). Enter the On or Off code respectively in the DND ON Code or DND OFF Code Field. 5. Press to accept the change. The DND icon on the LCD screen indicates that Do Not Disturb is enabled. Incoming calls will be rejected automatically and n New Missed Call ( n indicates the number of the missed call) will prompt Edition Eleven Page 171 of 289

172 on the LCD screen. Note: The Do Not Disturb feature is local to the phone and may be overridden by the server settings. For more information, contact your system administrator. e). Forwarding Calls 1. Press. 2. Select Features > Forward. 3. Press or to select the desired forwarding type, then press. The options are: Always: Incoming calls are immediately forwarded. Busy: Incoming calls are immediately forwarded if the phone is busy. No Answer: Incoming calls are forwarded if not answered after a period of time. If you select Always: 1. Press or to select Enable from the Always field. 2. Enter the destination number you want to forward all incoming calls to in the Forward to field. 3. (Optional.) Enter the always forward on code or always off code respectively in the On Code or Off Code field. If you select Busy: 1. Press or to select Enable from the Busy Field. 2. Enter the destination number you want to forward all incoming calls to when the phone is busy in the Forward to field. Edition Eleven Page 172 of 289

173 3. (Optional.) Enter the busy forward on code or busy off code respectively in the On Code or Off Code field. If you select No Answer: 1. Press or to select Enable from the No Answer field. 2. Enter the destination number you want to forward all unanswered incoming calls to in the Forward to field. 3. Press or to select the ring time to wait before forwarding in the After Duration field (The default ring time is 60 seconds). 4. (Optional.) Enter the no answer forward on code or off code respectively in the On Code or Off Code field. 5. Press to accept the change. The icon on the LCD screen indicates call forward is enabled. You may also configure the forward feature via the web user interface at the path Phone > Features. Disabling Call Forward: Do one of the following: Press Press when the phone is idle., select Features > Forward. Press or to select the forwarding type, then press. Press or to select Disable to disable the call forward. Forwarding an incoming call to another party: 1. When the phone rings, press. 2. Enter the number you want to forward the incoming call to. Edition Eleven Page 173 of 289

174 3. Press or. The LCD screen prompts a call forwarded message. f). Transfer Calls Calls may be transferred in three different ways: Blind Transfer: Transfer a call directly to another party without consulting. Semi-Attended Transfer: Transfer a call when receiving ringback. Attended Transfer: Transfer a call with prior consulting. Blind Transfer: 1. Press during a call. 2. Enter the number you want to transfer the call to. 3. Press again to complete the transfer. The call will be connected to the number to which you are transferring. Semi-Attended Transfer: 1. Press during a call. 2. Enter the number you want to transfer the call to. 3. Press or to dial out. 4. Press to complete the transfer when receiving the ringback. To perform an attended transfer: 1. Press during a call.. 2. Enter the number you want to transfer the call to. 3. Press or to dial out. 4. After the party answers the call, press to complete the transfer. If you are using a handset, the transfer can be completed by hanging up the handset. You may cancel the transfer before the call connects by pressing. Edition Eleven Page 174 of 289

175 g). Conference Calls Local Conference Call: 1. Place a call to the first party. 2. Press to create a new call. The active call is placed on hold. 3. Enter the number of the second party and press or. 4. When the second party answers the call, you can speak with him or her before adding to the conference. 5. Press again to join all parties in the conference. Joining two calls in a conference: Place two calls using two different accounts on the phone (for example, place the first call using account 1, then place the second call using account 2). Press or to select the call for conference and make sure the call is active (for example, select the call on account 1). Press to join the two calls in the conference on account 1. You can press to place the conference on hold. You may press the CONF key to split the conference call into two individual calls. To drop the conference call, press. Network Conference Call: To use this feature, contact your system administrator for the network conference-uri in advance, and configure the phone via web user interface: Click on Account > Advanced. Select the desired conference type from the pull-down list of Conference Type. Enter the conference URI (e.g. [email protected]) in the Conference URI field. Click Confirm to accept the change. Setting up a network conference call: 1. Place a call to the first party. 2. Press to create a new call. The active call is placed on hold. 3. Enter the number of the second party and press or. Edition Eleven Page 175 of 289

176 4. When the second party answers the call, press to add the second party to the conference. 5. Press to create a new call. The conference is placed on hold. 6. Enter the number of the new party then press or. 7. When the new party answers the call, press to add the new party to the conference. 8. Repeat steps 5 to 7 until you have added all intended parties. h). Parking Calls Configuring a call park key via phone user interface: 1. Press. 2. Select Features > DSS Keys. 3. Select the desired DSS Key. 4. Press or to select Key Event from the Type field. 5. Press or to select Call Park from the Key Type field. 6. Press or to select the desired line from the Account ID field. 7. Enter the call park feature code (contact your system administrator for it) in the Value field. 8. Press to accept the change. You may also configure a call park key via web user interface at the path Phone > DSS Keys. Parking a call: 1. User on phone A places a call to phone B. 2. User on phone A wants to take the call in a conference room for privacy, then presses the call park key on phone A. 3. (Optional)The SIP server sends the first available call park extension, which will appear on the LCD screen of phone A. 4. The user on phone A walks to an available conference room where the phone is designated as phone Edition Eleven Page 176 of 289

177 C. The user dials the call park retrieve code (or the call park extension (e.g. 150)) to retrieve the parked call. The system establishes a call between phone C and B. Note: The call park feature code and call park extension are predefined on the system server. Contact your system administrator for more information. If the parked call is not retrieved within a period of time assigned by the system, the phone performing call park feature will receive a call back. i). Directed Call Pickup Directed call pickup is used for picking up a call that is ringing at a specific phone number. Group call pickup is used for picking up a call that is ringing at any phone number in the group. The pickup group should be predefined, contact your system administrator for more information. Configuring a pickup key via phone user interface: 1. Press. 2. Select Features > DSS Keys. 3. Select the desired DSS key. 4. Press or to select Key Event from the Type field. 5. Press or to select Pick Up from the Key Type field. 6. Press or to select the desired line from the Account ID field. 7. Enter the pickup code followed by the specific phone number you want to pick up in the Value field. 8. Press to accept the change. Note: You may also configure a direct pickup key via web user interface at the path Phone > DSS Keys. Pickup a call directly: Press the pickup key on your phone when the specific phone number receives an is answered on your phone. incoming call. The call Edition Eleven Page 177 of 289

178 Group Call Pickup: Note: Use the previous procedure to configure the Group Pickup key. Press the group pickup key on your phone when a phone number in the group call. The call is answered on your phone. receives an incoming j). Anonymous Call The anonymous call feature can be used to block the identity and phone number on a specified outgoing line from displaying to the called party. Configuring anonymous call via phone user interface: 1. Press. 2. Select Features > Anonymous Call. 3. Press or to select the desired line from the Line ID field. 4. Press or to select Enable from the Anonymous Call field. 5. (Optional) Enter the anonymous call on code in the Call On Code field. 6. (Optional) Enter the anonymous call off code in the Call Off Code field. 7. Press to accept the change. Note: You may also configure anonymous call via web user interface at the path Account > Basic. When using the specific line to place an anonymous call, the LCD screen of the called party will display Anonymous. You may use the anonymous call rejection feature to reject incoming calls from anonymous callers. Anonymous call rejection automatically rejects incoming calls from callers who deliberately block their identities and numbers from displaying. Edition Eleven Page 178 of 289

179 Configuring anonymous call rejection via phone user interface: 1. Press. 2. Select Features > Anonymous Call. 3. Press or to select the desired line from the Line ID field. 4. Press or to scroll to the Rejection field. 5. Press or to select Enable from the Rejection field. 6. (Optional) Enter the anonymous call rejection on code in the Reject On Code field. 7. (Optional) Enter the anonymous call rejection off code in the Reject Off Code field. 8. Press to accept the change. You may also configure anonymous call rejection via web user interface at the path Account > Basic. k). Voic Configuring voice mail access codes via phone user interface: 1. Press. 2. Select Messages > Set Voice Mail. 3. Press or to select the account you want to set. 4. Press to select the proper input mode, then enter the voice mail access code (e.g.*88). 5. Press to accept the change. Note: The voice mail access code must be pre-defined on the system server. Contact your system administrator for the more information. Listening to voice messages: 1. When the phone user interface prompts receiving new voice mails, press or to dial out the voice mail access code. 2. Follow the voice prompt to listen to your voice messages. Edition Eleven Page 179 of 289

180 When all new voice mails are retrieved, the MESSAGE key LED will turn off. Alternatively you can dial 1000 to access the Voic system at any time. The system will prompt for your password. Note: when accessing the voice mail system for the first time your password is your extension #. Change this to a 4-digit number you can easily recall. Viewing voice mail via phone user interface: 1. Press. 2. Select Messages > View Voice Mail. The LCD screen displays the amount of voice mails that includes old or new voice mails. 3. Select an account and press to listen to the voice mails. l). Contact Directory Adding a contact: 1. Press when the phone is idle, then select Local Directory > Contact List. 2. Press or to select Enter, then press. 3. Enter a unique contact name in the Name field and enter the phone number in the proper field. 4. Press to accept the change. Editing a contact: 1. Press when the phone is idle, then select Local Directory > Contact List. 2. Press or to select Enter, then press. 3. Press or to select the desired contact, then press or to select Edit, then press. 4. Update the contact information. Press to accept the change. Deleting a contact: 1. Press when the phone is idle, then select Local Directory > Contact List. 2. Press or to select Enter, then press. 3. Press or to select the desired contact, then press or to select Del, then press. 4. Press when Delete Selected Item? prompts on the LCD screen. Edition Eleven Page 180 of 289

181 19. Yealink SIP-T22P Telephone a). Making a Call Using the handset:. Pick up the handset.. Enter the desired number using the keypad.. Press,, or the Send soft key. By default, the # key is set as a send key. You may also set the * key as a send key or set neither of them as send keys. Using the speakerphone: 1. With the handset on-hook, press or the line key to obtain a dial tone. 2. Enter the desired number using the keypad. 3. Press,, or the Send soft key. Or 1. Enter the desired number using the keypad. 2. Press,,, or the Send soft key. Placing a call using the headset: 1. With the optional headset connected, press to activate the headset mode. 2. Press the line key to obtain a dial tone. 3. Enter the desired number using the keypad. 4. Press,, or the Send soft key. Edition Eleven Page 181 of 289

182 With the optional headset connected: 1. Press to activate the headset mode. 2. Enter the desired number using the keypad. 3. Press,, or the Send soft key. Placing Multiple Calls: 1. To place a new call during an active call, press the line key. The active call is placed on hold. 2. Enter the desired number using the key pad. 3. Press,, or the Send soft key. Or 1. Press the Hold soft key to place the original call on hold. 2. Press the NewCall soft key. 3. Enter the desired number using the key pad. 4. Press,, or the Send soft key. You may press or to switch between the calls, then press the Resume soft key to retrieve the desired call. Redialing a call: Press twice. A call to your last placed call is attempted. To redial a previously placed call from your phone: 1. Press when the phone is idle. 2. Press or to select the desired entry from the dialed call list, then press or the Send soft key. b). Answering a Call To answer a call using the handset: Pick up the handset. To answer a call using the hands-free speakerphone mode: 1. Press. Edition Eleven Page 182 of 289

183 2. With the handset on-hook and headset mode deactivated, press the Answer soft key. 3. With the handset on-hook and headset mode deactivated, press the line key (the line key LED flashes green). To answer a call using the headset: 1. Press. 2. With the headset mode activated, press the Answer soft key. 3. With the headset mode activated, press the line key (the line key LED flashes green). Answering When in Another Call: If you have an active call and an incoming call arrives on the phone, do one of the following: Press the Answer soft key. The incoming call is answered and the original call is placed on hold. Or 1. Press to access the new call. 2. Press or the Answer soft key. The incoming call is answered and the original call is placed on hold. Note: You may ignore incoming calls by pressing the Reject soft key or the Silence soft key. Ending a call: If you are using the handset, press the Cancel soft key or hang up the handset. If you are using a headset, press the Cancel soft key. If you are using the speakerphone, press or the Cancel soft key. Note: To end a call placed on hold, you can press the Cancel soft key to end the call directly or press the Resume soft key to resume the call before ending it. Muting a call: Press during an active call. Press again to un-mute the call. c). Placing a call on Hold Press the Hold soft key during a call. The phone LCD screen will show the call on hold and the line key LED will flash green. Edition Eleven Page 183 of 289

184 Note: The phone will beep softly every 30 seconds as a reminder there is a call on hold. Resuming a call on hold: Press the Resume soft key. Multiple calls on hold: If multiple calls are placed on hold, press or to switch between the calls, then press the Resume soft key to retrieve the desired call. If more than two calls are on hold, an indication appears on the LCD screen, for example 2/3, indicating that this is the second call out of three calls. If multiple calls are on hold on more than one line key, you can view the details of the calls by pressing the corresponding line key and then press the Resume soft key to retrieve the call. d). Do Not Disturb You can enable or disable the Do Not Disturb (DND) mode on the phone. If DND mode is enabled, the phone will reject all incoming calls automatically and the callers will hear a busy signal or a message, depending on how your system administrator set up the configuration server. To activate the DND mode on the SIP-T22P IP phone: Press the DND soft key when the phone is idle. The is activated. icon on the LCD screen indicates that Do Not Disturb Incoming calls will be rejected automatically and n New Missed Call ( n indicates the number of the missed call) will prompt on the LCD screen. Note: The Do Not Disturb feature is local to the phone and may be overridden by the server settings. For more information, contact your system administrator. e). Forwarding Calls Press Menu > Features > Call Forward. Press or to select the desired forwarding type, then press the Enter soft key. The options are: Always Forward: Incoming calls are immediately forwarded. Busy Forward: Incoming calls are immediately forwarded if the phone is busy. No Answer Forward: Incoming calls are forwarded if not answered after a period of time. If you select Always Forward: 1. Press or, or the Switch soft key to select Enable from the Always field. Edition Eleven Page 184 of 289

185 2. Enter the destination number you want to forward all incoming calls to in the Forward to field. 3. (Optional.) Enter the always forward on code or always off code respectively in the On Code or Off Code field. If you select Busy Forward: 1. Press or, or the Switch soft key to select Enable from the Busy Field. 2. Enter the destination number you want to forward all incoming calls to when the phone is busy in the Forward to field. 3. (Optional.) Enter the busy forward on code or busy off code respectively in the On Code or Off Code field. If you select No Answer Forward: 1. Press or, or the Switch soft key to select Enable from the No Answer field. 2. Enter the destination number you want to forward all unanswered incoming calls to in the Forward to field. 3. Press or, or the Switch soft key to select the ring time to wait before forwarding in the After Ring Time field (The default ring time is 60 seconds). 4. (Optional.) Enter the no answer forward on code or off code respectively in the On Code or Off Code field. Press the Save soft key to accept the change or the Back soft key to cancel. The indicates call forward is enabled. icon on the LCD screen Edition Eleven Page 185 of 289

186 You may also configure the forward feature via the web user interface at the path Phone > Features. Disabling Call Forward: Press when the phone is idle. Press Menu > Features > Call Forward. Press or to select the desired forwarding type, then press the Enter soft key. Press or, or the Switch soft key to select Disable to disable the call forward. Forwarding an incoming call to another party: 1. When the phone rings, press the Fwd soft key. 2. Enter the number you want to forward the incoming call to. 3. Press,, or the Send soft key. The incoming call is forwarded. The LCD screen prompts a call forward message. f). Transfer Calls Calls may be transferred in three different ways: Blind Transfer: Transfer a call directly to another party without consulting. Semi-Attended Transfer: Transfer a call when receiving ringback. Attended Transfer: Transfer a call with prior consulting. Blind Transfer: 1. Press or the Tran soft key during a call. 2. Enter the number you want to transfer the call to. Edition Eleven Page 186 of 289

187 3. Press or the Tran soft key to complete the transfer. The call will be connected to the number to which you are transferring. Semi-Attended Transfer: Press or the Tran soft key during a call. Enter the number you want to transfer the call to. Press or to dial out. Press or the Tran soft key to complete the transfer when receiving the ringback. To perform an attended transfer: Press or the Tran soft key during a call.. Enter the number you want to transfer the call to. Press or to dial out. After the party answers the call, press or the Tran soft key to complete the transfer. If you are using a handset, the transfer can be completed by hanging up the handset. You may cancel the transfer before the call connects by pressing the Cancel soft key. g). Conference Calls Local Conference Call: 1. Place a call to the first party. 2. Press the Conf soft key to create a new call. The active call is placed on hold. 3. Enter the number of the second party and press,, or the Send soft key. 4. When the second party answers the call, you can speak with him or her before adding to the conference. 5. Press the Conf soft key again to join all parties in the conference. Joining two calls in a conference: Place two calls using two different accounts on the phone (for example, place the first call using account 1, then place the second call using account 2). Press or to select the call for conference and make sure the call is active (for example, select the call on account 1). Press the Conf soft key to join the two calls in the conference on account 1. You can press the Hold soft key to place the conference on hold. You may press the Split soft key to split the conference call into two individual calls. To drop the conference call, press the Cancel soft key. Edition Eleven Page 187 of 289

188 Network Conference Call: To use this feature, contact your system administrator for the network conference-uri in advance, and configure the phone via web user interface: Click on Account > Advanced. Select the desired conference type from the pull-down list of Conference Type. Enter the conference URI (e.g. in the Conference URI field. Click Confirm to accept the change. Setting up a network conference call: 1. Place a call to the first party. 2. Press the Conf soft key to create a new call. The active call is placed on hold. 3. Enter the number of the second party and press,, or the Send soft key. 4. When the second party answers the call, press the Conf soft key to add the second party to the conference. 5. Press the Conf soft key to create a new call. The conference is placed on hold. 6. Enter the number of the new party then press,, or the Send soft key. 7. When the new party answers the call, press the Conf soft key to add the new party to the conference. 8. Repeat steps 5 to 7 until you have added all intended parties. h). Parking Calls Configuring a call park key via phone user interface: 1. Press Menu > Features > DSS Keys. 2. Select the desired DSS key. 3. Press or, or the Switch soft key to select Key Event from the Type field. 4. Press or, or the Switch soft key to select Call Park from the Key Type field. Edition Eleven Page 188 of 289

189 5. Press or, or the Switch soft key to select the desired line from the Account ID field. 6. Enter the call park feature code (contact your system administrator for it) in the Value field. 7. Press the Save soft key to accept the change or the Back soft key to cancel. You may also configure a call park key via web user interface at the path Phone > DSS Keys. Parking a call: 1. User on phone A places a call to phone B. 2. User on phone A wants to take the call in a conference room for privacy, then presses the call park key on phone A. 3. (Optional)The SIP server sends the first available call park extension, which will appear on the LCD screen of phone A. 4. The user on phone A walks to an available conference room where the phone is designated as phone C. The user dials the call park retrieve code (or the call park extension (e.g. 150)) to retrieve the parked call. The system establishes a call between phone C and B. Note: The call park feature code and call park extension are predefined on the system server. Contact your system administrator for more information. If the parked call is not retrieved within a period of time assigned by the system, the phone performing call park feature will receive a call back. i). Directed Call Pickup Directed call pickup is used for picking up a call that is ringing at a specific phone number. Group call pickup is used for picking up a call that is ringing at any phone number in the group. The pickup group should be predefined, contact your system administrator for more information. Configuring a pickup key via phone user interface: 1. Press Menu > Features > DSS Keys. 2. Select the desired DSS key. 3. Press or, or the Switch soft key to select Key Event from the Type field. Edition Eleven Page 189 of 289

190 4. Press or, or the Switch soft key to select Pick Up from the Key Type field. 5. Press or, or the Switch soft key to select the desired line from the Account ID field. 6. Enter the pickup code followed by the specific phone number you want to pick up in the Value field. 7. Press the Save soft key to accept the change or the Back soft key to cancel. Note: You may also configure a direct pickup key via web user interface at the path Phone > DSS Keys. Pickup a call directly: Press the pickup key on your phone when the specific phone number receives an incoming call. The call is answered on your phone. Group Call Pickup: Note: Use the previous procedure to configure the Group Pickup key. Press the group pickup key on your phone when a phone number in the group call. The call is answered on your phone. receives an incoming j). Anonymous Call The anonymous call feature can be used to block the identity and phone number on a specified outgoing line from displaying to the called party. Configuring anonymous call via phone user interface: 1. Press Menu > Features > Anonymous Call. 2. Press or, or the Switch soft key to select the desired line from the Line ID field. 3. Press or, or the Switch soft key to select Enable from the Anonymous Call field. Edition Eleven Page 190 of 289

191 4. (Optional) Enter the anonymous call on code in the Call On Code field. 5. (Optional) Enter the anonymous call off code in the Call Off Code field. 6. Press the Save soft key to accept the change or the Back soft key to cancel. Note: You may also configure anonymous call via web user interface at the path Account > Basic. When using the specific line to place an anonymous call, the LCD screen of the called party will display Anonymous. You may use the anonymous call rejection feature to reject incoming calls from anonymous callers. Anonymous call rejection automatically rejects incoming calls from callers who deliberately block their identities and numbers from displaying. Configuring anonymous call rejection via phone user interface: 1. Press Menu > Features > Anonymous Call. 2. Press or, or the Switch soft key to select the desired line from the Line ID field. 3. Press or to scroll to the Rejection field. 4. Press or, or the Switch soft key to select Enable from the Rejection field. 5. (Optional) Enter the anonymous call rejection on code in the Reject On Code field. 6. (Optional) Enter the anonymous call rejection off code in the Reject Off Code field. 7. Press the Save soft key to accept the change or the Back soft key to cancel. You may also configure anonymous call rejection via web user interface at the path Account > Basic. k). Voic Configuring voice mail access codes via phone user interface: 1. Press Menu > Messages > Voice Mail > Set Voice Mail. Edition Eleven Page 191 of 289

192 2. Press or to highlight the account which you want to set. Press the 123 soft key to select the proper input mode and enter the voice mail access code. 3. Press the Save soft key to accept the change or the Back soft key to cancel. The Message Waiting Indicator on the idle screen indicates when you have new voice messages waiting. The Message key LED lights up Note: The voice mail access code must be pre-defined on the system server. Contact your system administrator for the more information. Listening to voice messages: 1. Press or the Connect soft key. 2. Follow the voice prompts to listen to your voice messages. Alternatively you can dial 1000 to access the Voic system at any time. The system will prompt for your password. Note: when accessing the voice mail system for the first time your password is your extension #. Change this to a 4-digit number you can easily recall. l). Contact Directory Adding a contact: 1. Press the Dir soft key when the phone is idle, then select Local Directory > Contacts. 2. Press the Add soft key to add a contact. 3. Enter a unique contact name in the Name field and enter the phone number in the proper field. 4. Press the Save soft key to accept the change. Editing a contact: 1. Press the Dir soft key when the phone is idle, then select Local Directory > Contacts. 2. Press or to select the desired contact. Press the Option soft key and then select Detail from the prompt list. 3. Update the contact information. 4. Press the Save soft key to accept the change. Edition Eleven Page 192 of 289

193 Deleting a contact: 1. Press the Dir soft key when the phone is idle, and then select Local Directory > Contacts. 2. Press or to select the desired contact. Press the Option soft key, then select Delete from the prompt list. 3. Press the OK soft key when Delete Selected Item? prompts on the LCD screen. Edition Eleven Page 193 of 289

194 20. Yealink SIP-T26P Telephone a). Making a Call You can place a call in three ways: Using the handset Using the speakerphone Using the headset You may also dial the number first, then choose the way you want to speak to the other party. You may search the call history, the local contact directory or the remote phonebook and dial from the search results. During a call, you can alternate between Speakerphone, Headset or Handset modes by pressing the speakerphone key, the HEADSET key or picking up the handset. The call duration of active call is visible on the LCD screen. Using the handset: 1. Pick up the handset. 2. Enter the desired number using the keypad. 3. Press,, or the Send soft key. By default, the # key is set as a send key. You may also set the * key as a send key or set neither of them as send keys. Using the speakerphone: 1. With the handset on-hook, press or the line key to obtain a dial tone. Edition Eleven Page 194 of 289

195 2. Enter the desired number using the keypad. 3. Press,, or the Send soft key. Or 1. Enter the desired number using the keypad. 2. Press,,, or the Send soft key. Placing a call using the headset: 1. With the optional headset connected, press to activate the headset mode. 2. Press the line key to obtain a dial tone. 3. Enter the desired number using the keypad. 4. Press,, or the Send soft key. With the optional headset connected: 1. Press to activate the headset mode. 2. Enter the desired number using the keypad. 3. Press,, or the Send soft key. Placing Multiple Calls: 1. To place a new call during an active call, press the line key. The active call is placed on hold. 2. Enter the desired number using the key pad. 3. Press,, or the Send soft key. Or 1. Press the Hold soft key to place the original call on hold. 2. Press the NewCall soft key. 3. Enter the desired number using the key pad. 4. Press,, or the Send soft key. You may press or to switch between the calls, then press the Resume soft key to retrieve the desired call. Edition Eleven Page 195 of 289

196 Redialing a call: Press twice. A call to your last placed call is attempted. To redial a previously placed call from your phone: 1. Press when the phone is idle. 2. Press or to select the desired entry from the dialed call list, then press or the Send soft key. b). Answering a Call The active call will appear on the LCD screen showing call duration and destination. To answer a call using the handset: Pick up the handset. To answer a call using the hands-free speakerphone mode: 1. Press. 2. With the handset on-hook and headset mode deactivated, press the Answer soft key. 3. With the handset on-hook and headset mode deactivated, press the line key (the line key LED flashes green). To answer a call using the headset: 1. Press. 2. With the headset mode activated, press the Answer soft key. 3. With the headset mode activated, press the line key (the line key LED flashes green). Answering When in Another Call: If you have an active call and an incoming call arrives on the phone, do one of the following: Press the Answer soft key. The incoming call is answered and the original call is placed on hold. Or Edition Eleven Page 196 of 289

197 1. Press to access the new call. 2. Press or the Answer soft key. The incoming call is answered and the original call is placed on hold. Note: You may ignore incoming calls by pressing the Reject soft key or the Silence soft key. Ending a call: If you are using the handset, press the Cancel soft key or hang up the handset. If you are using a headset, press the Cancel soft key. If you are using the speakerphone, press or the Cancel soft key. Note: To end a call placed on hold, you can press the Cancel soft key to end the call directly or press the Resume soft key to resume the call before ending it. Muting a call: Press during an active call. The phone LCD screen indicates that the call is on mute. Press again to un-mute the call. c). Placing a call on Hold You may place an active call on hold at any time. At most, one active call may be in progress on your phone. Other calls can be received and made while placing the original call on hold. When placing a call on hold, your IP PBX can play a melody or message to the other party while waiting. Press or the Hold soft key during a call. The phone LCD screen will show the call on hold and the line key LED will flash green. Note: The phone will beep softly every 30 seconds as a reminder there is a call on hold. Edition Eleven Page 197 of 289

198 Resuming a call on hold: Press or the Resume soft key. Multiple calls on hold: If multiple calls are placed on hold, press or to switch between the calls, then press the Resume soft key to retrieve the desired call. If more than two calls are on hold, an indication appears on the LCD screen, for example 2/3, indicating that this is the second call out of three calls. If multiple calls are on hold on more than one line key, you can view the details of the calls by pressing the corresponding line key and then press the Resume soft key to retrieve the call. d). Do Not Disturb You can enable or disable the Do Not Disturb (DND) mode on the phone. If DND mode is enabled, the phone will reject all incoming calls automatically and the callers will hear a busy signal or a message, depending on how your system administrator set up the configuration server. To activate the DND mode on the SIP-T26P IP phone: Press the DND soft key when the phone is idle. The is activated. icon on the LCD screen indicates that Do Not Disturb Incoming calls will be rejected automatically and n New Missed Call ( n indicates the number of the missed call) will prompt on the LCD screen. Note: The Do Not Disturb feature is local to the phone and may be overridden by the server settings. For more information, contact your system administrator. e). Forwarding Calls Press Menu > Features > Call Forward. Press or to select the desired forwarding type, then press the Enter soft key. The options are: Always Forward: Incoming calls are immediately forwarded. Busy Forward: Incoming calls are immediately forwarded if the phone is busy. No Answer Forward: Incoming calls are forwarded if not answered after a period of time. If you select Always Forward: 1. Press or, or the Switch soft key to select Enable from the Always field. Edition Eleven Page 198 of 289

199 2. Enter the destination number you want to forward all incoming calls to in the Forward to field. 3. (Optional.) Enter the always forward on code or always off code respectively in the On Code or Off Code field. If you select Busy Forward: 1. Press or, or the Switch soft key to select Enable from the Busy Field. 2. Enter the destination number you want to forward all incoming calls to when the phone is busy in the Forward to field. 3. (Optional) Enter the busy forward on code or busy off code respectively in the On Code or Off Code field. If you select No Answer Forward: 1. Press or, or the Switch soft key to select Enable from the No Answer field. 2. Enter the destination number you want to forward all unanswered incoming calls to in the Forward to field. 3. Press or, or the Switch soft key to select the ring time to wait before forwarding in the After Ring Time field (The default ring time is 60 seconds). 4. (Optional) Enter the no answer forward on code or off code respectively in the On Code or Off Code field. Press the Save soft key to accept the change or the Back soft key to cancel. The indicates call forward is enabled. icon on the LCD screen You may also configure the forward feature via the web user interface at the path Phone > Features. Edition Eleven Page 199 of 289

200 Disabling Call Forward: Press when the phone is idle. Press Menu > Features > Call Forward. Press or to select the desired forwarding type, then press the Enter soft key. Press or, or the Switch soft key to select Disable to disable the call forward. Forwarding an incoming call to another party: 1. When the phone rings, press the Fwd soft key. 2. Enter the number you want to forward the incoming call to. 3. Press,, or the Send soft key. The incoming call is forwarded. The LCD screen prompts a call forward message. f). Transfer Calls Calls may be transferred in three different ways: Blind Transfer: Transfer a call directly to another party without consulting. Semi-Attended Transfer: Transfer a call when receiving ringback. Attended Transfer: Transfer a call with prior consulting. Blind Transfer: 1. Press or the Tran soft key during a call. 2. Enter the number you want to transfer the call to. 3. Press or the Tran soft key to complete the transfer. The call will be connected to the number to which you are transferring. Edition Eleven Page 200 of 289

201 Semi-Attended Transfer: Press or the Tran soft key during a call. Enter the number you want to transfer the call to. Press or to dial out. Press or the Tran soft key to complete the transfer when receiving the ringback. To perform an attended transfer: Press or the Tran soft key during a call.. Enter the number you want to transfer the call to. Press or to dial out. After the party answers the call, press or the Tran soft key to complete the transfer. If you are using a handset, the transfer can be completed by hanging up the handset. You may cancel the transfer before the call connects by pressing the Cancel soft key. g). Conference Calls Local Conference Call: 1. Place a call to the first party. 2. Press or the Conf soft key to create a new call. The active call is placed on hold. 3. Enter the number of the second party and press,, or the Send soft key. 4. When the second party answers the call, you can speak with him or her before adding to the conference. 5. Press or the Conf soft key again to join all parties in the conference. Joining two calls in a conference: Place two calls using two different accounts on the phone (for example, place the first call using account 1, then place the second call using account 2). Press or to select the call for conference and make sure the call is active (for example, select the call on account 1). Press or the Conf soft key to join the two calls in the conference on account 1. Edition Eleven Page 201 of 289

202 You can press or the Hold soft key to place the conference on hold. You may press the Split soft key to split the conference call into two individual calls. To drop the conference call, press the Cancel soft key. Network Conference Call: To use this feature, contact your system administrator for the network conference-uri in advance, and configure the phone via web user interface: Click on Account > Advanced. Select the desired conference type from the pull-down list of Conference Type. Enter the conference URI (e.g. in the Conference URI field. Click Confirm to accept the change. Setting up a network conference call: 1. Place a call to the first party. 2. Press or the Conf soft key to create a new call. The active call is placed on hold. 3. Enter the number of the second party and press,, or the Send soft key. 4. When the second party answers the call, press or the Conf soft key to add the second party to the conference. 5. Press the Conf soft key to create a new call. The conference is placed on hold. 6. Enter the number of the new party then press,, or the Send soft key. 7. When the new party answers the call, press or the Conf soft key to add the new party to the conference. 8. Repeat steps 5 to 7 until you have added all intended parties. h). Parking Calls Configuring a call park key via phone user interface: 1. Press Menu > Features > DSS Keys. 2. Select the desired DSS key. 3. Press or, or the Switch soft key to select Key Event from the Type field. 4. Press or, or the Switch soft key to select Call Park from the Key Type field. Edition Eleven Page 202 of 289

203 5. Press or, or the Switch soft key to select the desired line from the Account ID field. 6. Enter the call park feature code (contact your system administrator for it) in the Value field. 7. Press the Save soft key to accept the change or the Back soft key to cancel. You may also configure a call park key via web user interface at the path Phone > DSS Keys. Parking a call: 1. User on phone A places a call to phone B. 2. User on phone A wants to take the call in a conference room for privacy, then presses the call park key on phone A. 3. (Optional)The SIP server sends the first available call park extension, which will appear on the LCD screen of phone A. 4. The user on phone A walks to an available conference room where the phone is designated as phone C. The user dials the call park retrieve code (or the call park extension (e.g. 150)) to retrieve the parked call. The system establishes a call between phone C and B. Note: The call park feature code and call park extension are predefined on the system server. Contact your system administrator for more information. If the parked call is not retrieved within a period of time assigned by the system, the phone performing call park feature will receive a call back. i). Directed Call Pickup Directed call pickup is used for picking up a call that is ringing at a specific phone number. Group call pickup is used for picking up a call that is ringing at any phone number in the group. The pickup group should be predefined, contact your system administrator for more information. Configuring a pickup key via phone user interface: 1. Press Menu > Features > DSS Keys. 2. Select the desired DSS key. 3. Press or, or the Switch soft key to select Key Event from the Type field. Edition Eleven Page 203 of 289

204 4. Press or, or the Switch soft key to select Pick Up from the Key Type field. 5. Press or, or the Switch soft key to select the desired line from the Account ID field. 6. Enter the pickup code followed by the specific phone number you want to pick up in the Value field. 7. Press the Save soft key to accept the change or the Back soft key to cancel. Note: You may also configure a direct pickup key via web user interface at the path Phone > DSS Keys. Pickup a call directly: Press the pickup key on your phone when the specific phone number receives an is answered on your phone. incoming call. The call Group Call Pickup: Note: Use the previous procedure to configure the Group Pickup key. Press the group pickup key on your phone when a phone number in the group call. The call is answered on your phone. receives an incoming j). Anonymous Call The anonymous call feature can be used to block the identity and phone number on a specified outgoing line from displaying to the called party. Configuring anonymous call via phone user interface: 1. Press Menu > Features > Anonymous Call. 2. Press or, or the Switch soft key to select the desired line from the Line ID field. 3. Press or, or the Switch soft key to select Enable from the Anonymous Call field. 4. (Optional) Enter the anonymous call on code in the Call On Code field. Edition Eleven Page 204 of 289

205 5. (Optional) Enter the anonymous call off code in the Call Off Code field. 6. Press the Save soft key to accept the change or the Back soft key to cancel. Note: You may also configure anonymous call via web user interface at the path Account > Basic. When using the specific line to place an anonymous call, the LCD screen of the called party will display Anonymous. You may use the anonymous call rejection feature to reject incoming calls from anonymous callers. Anonymous call rejection automatically rejects incoming calls from callers who deliberately block their identities and numbers from displaying. Configuring anonymous call rejection via phone user interface: 1. Press Menu > Features > Anonymous Call. 2. Press or, or the Switch soft key to select the desired line from the Line ID field. 3. Press or to scroll to the Rejection field. 4. Press or, or the Switch soft key to select Enable from the Rejection field. 5. (Optional) Enter the anonymous call rejection on code in the Reject On Code field. 6. (Optional) Enter the anonymous call rejection off code in the Reject Off Code field. 7. Press the Save soft key to accept the change or the Back soft key to cancel. You may also configure anonymous call rejection via web user interface at the path Account > Basic. k). Voic Configuring voice mail access codes via phone user interface: 1. Press Menu > Messages > Voice Mail > Set Voice Mail. 2. Press or to highlight the account which you want to set. Press the 123 soft key to select the proper input mode and enter the voice mail access code. Edition Eleven Page 205 of 289

206 3. Press the Save soft key to accept the change or the Back soft key to cancel. The Message Waiting Indicator on the idle screen indicates when you have new voice messages waiting. The Message key LED lights up Note: The voice mail access code must be pre-defined on the system server. Contact your system administrator for the more information. Listening to voice messages: 1. Press or the Connect soft key. 2. Follow the voice prompts to listen to your voice messages. Alternatively you can dial 1000 to access the Voic system at any time. The system will prompt for your password. Note: when accessing the voice mail system for the first time your password is your extension #. Change this to a 4-digit number you can easily recall. l). Contact Directory Adding a contact: 1. Press the Dir soft key when the phone is idle, then select Local Directory > Contacts. 2. Press the Add soft key to add a contact. 3. Enter a unique contact name in the Name field and enter the phone number in the proper field. 4. Press the Save soft key to accept the change. Editing a contact: 1. Press the Dir soft key when the phone is idle, then select Local Directory > Contacts. 2. Press or to select the desired contact. Press the Option soft key and then select Detail from the prompt list. 3. Update the contact information. 4. Press the Save soft key to accept the change. Deleting a contact: 1. Press the Dir soft key when the phone is idle, and then select Local Directory > Contacts. 2. Press or to select the desired contact. Press the Option soft key, then select Delete from the prompt list. 3. Press the OK soft key when Delete Selected Item? prompts on the LCD screen. Edition Eleven Page 206 of 289

207 Edition Eleven Page 207 of 289

208 21. Yealink SIP-T28P Telephone a). Making a Call You can place a call in three ways: Using the handset Using the speakerphone Using the headset You may also dial the number first, then choose the way you want to speak to the other party. You may search the call history, the local contact directory or the remote phonebook and dial from the search results. During a call, you can alternate between Speakerphone, Headset or Handset modes by pressing the speakerphone key, the HEADSET key or picking up the handset. The call duration of active call is visible on the LCD screen. Using the handset: 1. Pick up the handset. 2. Enter the desired number using the keypad. 3. Press,, or the Send soft key. By default, the # key is set as a send key. You may also set the * key as a send key or set neither of them as send keys. Edition Eleven Page 208 of 289

209 Using the speakerphone: 1. With the handset on-hook, press or the line key to obtain a dial tone. 2. Enter the desired number using the keypad. 3. Press,, or the Send soft key. Or 1. Enter the desired number using the keypad. 2. Press,,, or the Send soft key. Placing a call using the headset: 1. With the optional headset connected, press to activate the headset mode. 2. Press the line key to obtain a dial tone. 3. Enter the desired number using the keypad. 4. Press,, or the Send soft key. With the optional headset connected: 1. Press to activate the headset mode. 2. Enter the desired number using the keypad. 3. Press,, or the Send soft key. Placing Multiple Calls: 1. To place a new call during an active call, press the line key. The active call is placed on hold. 2. Enter the desired number using the key pad. 3. Press,, or the Send soft key. Or 1. Press the Hold soft key to place the original call on hold. 2. Press the NewCall soft key. 3. Enter the desired number using the key pad. 4. Press,, or the Send soft key. You may press or to switch between the calls, then press the Resume soft key to retrieve the desired call. Edition Eleven Page 209 of 289

210 Redialing a call: Press twice. A call to your last placed call is attempted. To redial a previously placed call from your phone: 1. Press when the phone is idle. 2. Press or to select the desired entry from the dialed call list, then press or the Send soft key. b). Answering a Call The active call will appear on the LCD screen showing call duration and destination. To answer a call using the handset: Pick up the handset. To answer a call using the hands-free speakerphone mode: 1. Press. 2. With the handset on-hook and headset mode deactivated, press the Answer soft key. 3. With the handset on-hook and headset mode deactivated, press the line key (the line key LED flashes green). To answer a call using the headset: 1. Press. 2. With the headset mode activated, press the Answer soft key. 3. With the headset mode activated, press the line key (the line key LED flashes green). Answering When in Another Call: If you have an active call and an incoming call arrives on the phone, do one of the following: Press the Answer soft key. The incoming call is answered and the original call is placed on hold. Or 1. Press to access the new call. Edition Eleven Page 210 of 289

211 2. Press or the Answer soft key. The incoming call is answered and the original call is placed on hold. Note: You may ignore incoming calls by pressing the Reject soft key or the Silence soft key. Ending a call: If you are using the handset, press the Cancel soft key or hang up the handset. If you are using a headset, press the Cancel soft key. If you are using the speakerphone, press or the Cancel soft key. Note: To end a call placed on hold, you can press the Cancel soft key to end the call directly or press the Resume soft key to resume the call before ending it. Muting a call: Press during an active call. The phone LCD screen indicates that the call is on mute. Press again to un-mute the call. c). Placing a call on Hold You may place an active call on hold at any time. At most, one active call may be in progress on your phone. Other calls can be received and made while placing the original call on hold. When placing a call on hold, your IP PBX can play a melody or message to the other party while waiting. Press or the Hold soft key during a call. The phone LCD screen will show the call on hold and the line key LED will flash green. Edition Eleven Page 211 of 289

212 Note: The phone will beep softly every 30 seconds as a reminder there is a call on hold. Resuming a call on hold: Press or the Resume soft key. Multiple calls on hold: If multiple calls are placed on hold, press or to switch between the calls, then press the Resume soft key to retrieve the desired call. If more than two calls are on hold, an indication appears on the LCD screen, for example 2/4, indicating that this is the second call out of four calls. If multiple calls are on hold on more than one line key, you can view the details of the calls by pressing the corresponding line key and then press the Resume soft key to retrieve the call. d). Do Not Disturb You can enable or disable the Do Not Disturb (DND) mode on the phone. If DND mode is enabled, the phone will reject all incoming calls automatically and the callers will hear a busy signal or a message, depending on how your system administrator set up the configuration server. To activate the DND mode on the SIP-T28P IP phone: Press the DND soft key when the phone is idle. The is activated. icon on the LCD screen indicates that Do Not Disturb Incoming calls will be rejected automatically and n New Missed Call ( n indicates the number of the missed call) will prompt on the LCD screen. Note: The Do Not Disturb feature is local to the phone and may be overridden by the server settings. For more information, contact your system administrator. e). Forwarding Calls Press Menu > Features > Call Forward. Press or to select the desired forwarding type, then press the Enter soft key. The options are: Always Forward: Incoming calls are immediately forwarded. Edition Eleven Page 212 of 289

213 Busy Forward: Incoming calls are immediately forwarded if the phone is busy. No Answer Forward: Incoming calls are forwarded if not answered after a period of time. If you select Always Forward: 1. Press or, or the Switch soft key to select Enable from the Always field. 2. Enter the destination number you want to forward all incoming calls to in the Forward to field. 3. (Optional.) Enter the always forward on code or always off code respectively in the On Code or Off Code field. If you select Busy Forward: 1. Press or, or the Switch soft key to select Enable from the Busy Field. 2. Enter the destination number you want to forward all incoming calls to when the phone is busy in the Forward to field. 3. (Optional) Enter the busy forward on code or busy off code respectively in the On Code or Off Code field. If you select No Answer Forward: 1. Press or, or the Switch soft key to select Enable from the No Answer field. Edition Eleven Page 213 of 289

214 2. Enter the destination number you want to forward all unanswered incoming calls to in the Forward to field. 3. Press or, or the Switch soft key to select the ring time to wait before forwarding in the After Ring Time field (The default ring time is 60 seconds). 4. (Optional) Enter the no answer forward on code or off code respectively in the On Code or Off Code field. Press the Save soft key to accept the change or the Back soft key to cancel. The indicates call forward is enabled. icon on the LCD screen You may also configure the forward feature via the web user interface at the path Phone > Features. Disabling Call Forward: Press when the phone is idle. Press Menu > Features > Call Forward. Press or to select the desired forwarding type, then press the Enter soft key. Press or, or the Switch soft key to select Disable to disable the call forward. Forwarding an incoming call to another party: 1. When the phone rings, press the Fwd soft key. 2. Enter the number you want to forward the incoming call to. 3. Press,, or the Send soft key. The incoming call is forwarded. The LCD screen prompts a call forward message. f). Transfer Calls Calls may be transferred in three different ways: Blind Transfer: Transfer a call directly to another party without consulting. Semi-Attended Transfer: Transfer a call when receiving ringback. Attended Transfer: Transfer a call with prior consulting. Edition Eleven Page 214 of 289

215 Blind Transfer: 1. Press or the Transfer soft key during a call. 2. Enter the number you want to transfer the call to. 3. Press or the Tran soft key to complete the transfer. The call will be connected to the number to which you are transferring. Semi-Attended Transfer: Press or the Transfer soft key during a call. Enter the number you want to transfer the call to. Press or to dial out. Press or the Transfer soft key to complete the transfer when receiving the ringback. To perform an attended transfer: Press or the Transfer soft key during a call. Enter the number you want to transfer the call to. Press or to dial out. After the party answers the call, press or the Transfer soft key to complete the transfer. If you are using a handset, the transfer can be completed by hanging up the handset. You may cancel the transfer before the call connects by pressing the Cancel soft key. g). Conference Calls Local Conference Call: 1. Place a call to the first party. 2. Press or the Conf soft key to create a new call. The active call is placed on hold. 3. Enter the number of the second party and press,, or the Send soft key. Edition Eleven Page 215 of 289

216 4. When the second party answers the call, you can speak with him or her before adding to the conference. 5. Press or the Conf soft key again to join all parties in the conference. Joining two calls in a conference: Place two calls using two different accounts on the phone (for example, place the first call using account 1, then place the second call using account 2). Press or to select the call for conference and make sure the call is active (for example, select the call on account 1). Press or the Conf soft key to join the two calls in the conference on account 1. You can press or the Hold soft key to place the conference on hold. You may press the Split soft key to split the conference call into two individual calls. To drop the conference call, press the Cancel soft key. Network Conference Call: To use this feature, contact your system administrator for the network conference-uri in advance, and configure the phone via web user interface: Click on Account > Advanced. Select the desired conference type from the pull-down list of Conference Type. Enter the conference URI (e.g. [email protected]) in the Conference URI field. Click Confirm to accept the change. Setting up a network conference call: 1. Place a call to the first party. 2. Press or the Conf soft key to create a new call. The active call is placed on hold. 3. Enter the number of the second party and press,, or the Send soft key. 4. When the second party answers the call, press or the Conf soft key to add the second party to the conference. 5. Press the Conf soft key to create a new call. The conference is placed on hold. Edition Eleven Page 216 of 289

217 6. Enter the number of the new party then press,, or the Send soft key. 7. When the new party answers the call, press or the Conf soft key to add the new party to the conference. 8. Repeat steps 5 to 7 until you have added all intended parties. h). Speed Dial Configuring a speed dial key: 1. Press the Menu soft key when the phone is idle, then select Features > DSS Keys > Memory Keys (or Line Keys). 2. Select the desired DSS key, then press the Enter soft key. 3. Select Speed Dial from the Type field, select the desired line from the Account ID field and enter the number in the Value field. 4. Press the Save soft key to accept the change. Using the speed dial key: Press the speed dial key to dial out the preset number. i). Directed Call Pickup Directed call pickup is used for picking up a call that is ringing at a specific phone number. Group call pickup is used for picking up a call that is ringing at any phone number in the group. The pickup group should be predefined, contact your system administrator for more information. Configuring a pickup key via phone user interface: 1. Press Menu > Features > DSS Keys. 2. Select the desired DSS key. 3. Press or, or the Switch soft key to select Key Event from the Type field. 4. Press or, or the Switch soft key to select Pick Up from the Key Type field. 5. Press or, or the Switch soft key to select the desired line from the Account ID field. 6. Enter the pickup code followed by the specific phone number you want to pick up in the Value field. Edition Eleven Page 217 of 289

218 7. Press the Save soft key to accept the change or the Back soft key to cancel. Note: You may also configure a direct pickup key via web user interface at the path Phone > DSS Keys. Pickup a call directly: Press the pickup key on your phone when the specific phone number receives an is answered on your phone. incoming call. The call Group Call Pickup: Note: Use the previous procedure to configure the Group Pickup key. Press the group pickup key on your phone when a phone number in the group call. The call is answered on your phone. receives an incoming j). Anonymous Call The anonymous call feature can be used to block the identity and phone number on a specified outgoing line from displaying to the called party. Configuring anonymous call via phone user interface: 1. Press Menu > Features > Anonymous Call. 2. Press or, or the Switch soft key to select the desired line from the Line ID field. 3. Press or, or the Switch soft key to select Enable from the Anonymous Call field. 4. (Optional) Enter the anonymous call on code in the Call On Code field. 5. (Optional) Enter the anonymous call off code in the Call Off Code field. 6. Press the Save soft key to accept the change or the Back soft key to cancel. Note: You may also configure anonymous call via web user interface at the path Account > Basic. When using the specific line to place an anonymous call, the LCD screen of the called party will display Anonymous. Edition Eleven Page 218 of 289

219 You may use the anonymous call rejection feature to reject incoming calls from anonymous callers. Anonymous call rejection automatically rejects incoming calls from callers who deliberately block their identities and numbers from displaying. Configuring anonymous call rejection via phone user interface: 1. Press Menu > Features > Anonymous Call. 2. Press or, or the Switch soft key to select the desired line from the Line ID field. 3. Press or to scroll to the Rejection field. 4. Press or, or the Switch soft key to select Enable from the Rejection field. 5. (Optional) Enter the anonymous call rejection on code in the Reject On Code field. 6. (Optional) Enter the anonymous call rejection off code in the Reject Off Code field. 7. Press the Save soft key to accept the change or the Back soft key to cancel. You may also configure anonymous call rejection via web user interface at the path Account > Basic. k). Voic Configuring voice mail access codes via phone user interface: 1. Press Menu > Messages > Voice Mail > Set Voice Mail. 2. Press or to highlight the account which you want to set. Press the 123 soft key to select the proper input mode and enter the voice mail access code (e.g.*97). Edition Eleven Page 219 of 289

220 3. Press the Save soft key to accept the change or the Back soft key to cancel. The Message Waiting Indicator on the idle screen indicates when you have new voice messages waiting. The Message key LED lights up Note: The voice mail access code must be pre-defined on the system server. Contact your system administrator for the more information. Listening to voice messages: 1. Press or the Connect soft key to dial out the access voice mail code. 2. Follow the voice prompts to listen to your voice messages. Alternatively you can dial 1000 to access the Voic system at any time. The system will prompt for your password. Note: when accessing the voice mail system for the first time your password is your extension #. Change this to a 4-digit number you can easily recall. Viewing voice mail messages: 1. Press Menu > Messages > Voice Mail > View Voice Mail. The phone LCD screen displays the amount of the voice mails that includes new or old voice mails. 2. Select an account then press the Connect soft key to listen to the voice mails. l). Text Messages You may send and receive text messages using the SIP-T28P IP phone. New text messages may be indicated both acoustically and visually. When receiving a new text message, the phone will play a warning tone, the phone LCD screen will prompt receiving new text messages with the number of waiting messages (example: 5 New Text Message ) and a flashing icon. Edition Eleven Page 220 of 289

221 Reading a text message: 1. Press Menu > Messages > Text Message > New Message. 2. Compose the new text message. You can press the abc soft key to change the input mode. 3. Press the Send soft key. 4. (Optional.) Press or, or the Switch soft key to select the desired account from the From field. 5. Enter the number you want to send the message to in the To field. 6. Press the Send soft key to send the message or the Back soft key to cancel. You may also send a text message via web user interface at the path Phone > SMS. Replying to a text message: 1. Press Menu > Messages > Text Message > Inbox. 2. Select the desired message and press the Reply soft key. 3. Compose the new text message. You can press the abc soft key to change the input mode. 4. Press the Send soft key after completing the content. Deleting a text message: 1. Press Menu > Messages > Text Message > Inbox (Sentbox, Outbox or Draftbox). 2. Select the desired message and then press the Delete soft key. Edition Eleven Page 221 of 289

222 3. Select Delete This to delete the desired message. The LCD screen prompts "Delete Message?". 4. Press the Yes soft key to delete this message or the No soft key to cancel. Note: You may also delete all text messages by pressing the Delete soft key and then select Delete All. You can refer to the above steps. You may also delete a specific message after retrieving by pressing the Delete soft key. m). Contact Directory Adding a contact: 1. Press the Directory soft key when the phone is idle, then select Local Directory > Contacts. 2. Press the Add soft key to add a contact. 3. Enter a unique contact name in the Name field and enter the phone number in the proper field. 4. Press the Save soft key to accept the change. Editing a contact: 1. Press the Directory soft key when the phone is idle, then select Local Directory > Contacts. 2. Press or to select the desired contact. Press the Option soft key and then select Detail from the prompt list. 3. Update the contact information. 4. Press the Save soft key to accept the change. Edition Eleven Page 222 of 289

223 Deleting a contact: 1. Press the Directory soft key when the phone is idle, and then select Local Directory > Contacts. 2. Press or to select the desired contact. Press the Option soft key, then select Delete from the prompt list. 3. Press the OK soft key when Delete Selected Item? prompts on the LCD screen. Edition Eleven Page 223 of 289

224 22. Yealink SIP-T32G Telephone a). Making a Call You may make a phone call via the following devices: 1. Pick up the handset, icon will be shown in the idle screen. 2. Press the Speaker button, icon will be shown in the idle screen. 3. Press the Headset button if the headset is connected to the Headset port in advance. In the dial-up interface, the icon will be shown in the idle screen. Dial Number Directly: Dial the number. Press Send soft key. Dial from Pool: In dial-up interface, press Pool soft key. Use the Navigation keys to highlight your choice. Choose the corresponding option. Select a record, then press the Send/Dial button. Redial: Press Redial button to enter the Dialed Calls interface and choose a record to dial out. During the call, you may alternate between Headset, Handset and Speakerphone by pressing the corresponding buttons or picking up the handset. If you have registered more than one account, you can choose a certain account to make your call: 1. Press the Left/Right navigation key to choose a default account when your phone is in idle status. 2. In the dial-up interface, press the Line soft key to choose an account. Then press the Select soft key to confirm. 3. Press the three line keys on the keypad to activate the chosen account. b). Answering a Call To answer an incoming call, lift the handset. To answer using the speakerphone, press the Speaker button. To answer using the headset, press the Headset button. Edition Eleven Page 224 of 289

225 If you are on an active call, the LCD screen will display Incoming Call: #. Press the Answer soft key to answer the call or Reject soft key to refuse the call. Denying an incoming call: Press Reject soft key or X button to deny the incoming call directly. c). Do Not Disturb Press DND soft key to activate Do Not Disturb Mode. Further incoming calls will be rejected and the display will show the icon. Press DND soft key again to deactivate DND mode. d). Muting a call This function allows you to mute the microphone of the active audio device during a call. You cannot be heard by the other party. You can still hear all other parties while mute is enabled. When you press the X button, the conversation will be muted. To mute/resume a conversation: Press X button to mute the call during a conversation. The icon to unmute the call return to normal conversation. will be shown in the LCD. Press it again e). Putting a call on Hold This call function allows you to place an active call on hold. In this case your IP PBX might play a melody or message to the other party while waiting. Other calls can be received and made while having a call on hold. Edition Eleven Page 225 of 289

226 To hold/retrieve a call: 1. Press the Hold soft key to put your active call on hold. 2. During the call, there will be an audio tone every 30 seconds indicating a current call on hold. 3. If there is only one call on hold, press the Resume soft key or Hold soft key to retrieve the call. 4. If there is more than one call on hold, press the SWAP soft key to switch the conversation. 5. If you want to hold all calls, you may press the line key, which you set as Hold, then press the Up/Down navigation key to highlight the call. Press the corresponding line key (set as Hold) to retrieve the call. You may also press the line key to establish a new call and then all calls will be held. f). Call Waiting To enable/disable Call Waiting via Phone interface: 1. Press Menu > Features > Call Waiting. 2. Use the navigation key or Switch soft key to enable/disable the call waiting option. 3. Use the navigation key or Switch soft key to enable/disable the Play Tone option. This option is used to define whether to play ring tones when there is an incoming call during an active call. 4. Press Save soft key to save the change, or Back soft key to return to the previous menu. g). DSS Keys The phone has 3 line keys, which are able to set up to 30 functions per key. Set up DSS key via phone interface: 1. Press Menu > Features > DSS keys to enter into the configure page. Edition Eleven Page 226 of 289

227 2. Choose one of the keys to be assigned. 3. Choose the type, and then configure the corresponding contents. Assigning a key: Users can set a specific button ( # or * ) to activate as the send button. To set the send key via the IP phone interface: 1. Press Menu > Features > Key as Send to enter the configuration page. 2. Press the Switch soft key to choose a button you want to use as the send key: #, *, or disable this option. 3. Press the Save soft key to save the change. Assigning a Hot Line number: 1. Press Menu > Features > Hot Line to enter the configuration page. 2. Enter the hot line number and hot line delay time (for example, 10 seconds), then press the Save soft key to save the change. 3. When you pick up the handset or press the speaker button, it will dial the number automatically if you do not press any keys for 10 seconds. Edition Eleven Page 227 of 289

228 h). Anonymous Call 1. Press Menu > Features > Anonymous Call to enter the configuration page. 2. By using the Switch soft key, you can choose the Line ID. 3. Press the navigation key to enter and choose whether to enable the anonymous call function. This feature allows the subscriber to make a call with the blocked display of their calling identification information. i). Auto Redial Auto redial is a telephone feature that redials a busy number repetitively with preset times before stopping. 1. Press Menu > Features > Auto Redial to enter the configuration page. 2. By using the Switch soft key, you can choose whether to enable the auto redial function. 3. Press the navigation key to choose and set the redial interval. It is measured by seconds. 4. Press the navigation key to choose and set the redial times. 5. Press Save soft key to save the change. Note: When you dial a busy number after setting the auto redial function to Enable, the phone will pop up an Auto Redial window to ask whether you want to redial. If yes, press OK. If you do nothing in this interface for 5 seconds, it will automatically turn to the idle interface. j). Intercom 1. Press Menu > Features > Intercom to enter the configuration page. Edition Eleven Page 228 of 289

229 2. Intercom Allow: To set whether to answer the incoming intercom calls. 3. Intercom Mute: To set whether to mute the incoming intercom calls automatically. 4. Intercom Tone: To set whether to play ring tones when there is incoming intercom calls to your extension. 5. Intercom Barge: To set whether to answer the incoming intercom calls during a conversation. If the option is enabled, when there are incoming intercom calls to your extension and if you are on an intercom conversation, it will refuse the call automatically or, it will put the current call on hold and put the incoming intercom call through. 6. Choose and set the different options by navigation key and the Switch soft key. 7. Press the Save soft key to save the change. k). Directory Adding a local group to the directory via Phone interface: 1. Press Directory > Local Directory to enter into the contacts page. 2. Press AddGroup soft key to enter into the Add Group page. 3. Enter the Group Name and choose the Ring. 4. Press the Save soft key to save. All the contacts will show on the Contacts group. For example: if you add a contact in AAA group and add another contact in BBB group, you can check the records in each group. You may also check all the records in Contacts group. Deleting a Group via Phone interface: Edition Eleven Page 229 of 289

230 1. Press Directory > Local Directory to enter into the contacts page. 2. Choose a group, Press Option > Delete/Delete All Group soft key to delete this or all group. 3. A pop-up warning window will ask you to confirm deleting the group. 4. Press OK soft key to confirm the operation or press the Cancel soft key to return to the directory. Adding a contact to a local directory: 1. Press Directory > Local Directory 2. Choose a group and press the Enter soft key. 3. Press Add soft key, enter Name, Office, Mobile and Other phone number. Use the abc soft key to choose an input method like Numeric, Upper/Lower Case Alphanumeric. 4. If you want to assign a contact to a specific account, you can use navigation key to select desired account. 5. Choose and set a special ring tone for the contact. 6. Use the navigation key to select the group you want to assign. 7. Choose photo, then press Enter soft key to enter into the edit page. Use the navigation key to select a photo for this contact. Press OK soft key to confirm and return to the previous screen. 8. Press Save soft key to add the record to contacts. 9. Press Save soft key to add the record to contacts or Back soft key to cancel. Editing a contact via Phone interface: 1. Press Directory > Local Directory 2. Choose a group, and press the Enter soft key. Edition Eleven Page 230 of 289

231 3. Use the navigation key to highlight the contact you want to edit. Press Option > Detail and enter into the edit page. 4. Make the change. Press Save soft key to save the change or press Back soft key to return to the directory. Deleting a contact from the local directory: 1.Press Directory > Local Directory 2. Choose a group, and press the Enter soft key. 3. Use the navigation key to highlight the contact you want to delete. Press Option soft key, and scroll to Delete> Press OK soft key. 4. A warning window will pop up asking whether to confirm deleting the contact. 5. Press OK soft key to confirm the operation or press the Cancel soft key to return to the directory. Searching a contact in local directory: 1. Press Directory > Local Directory > Search to enter into the search page or choose a group and press the Enter soft key. Press the number keypad to enter into the search page directly. 2. The search interface will display where you may enter the contact you are searching for. Press the OK soft key. 3. The phone will display the contact. Edition Eleven Page 231 of 289

232 Moving a contact to blacklist: Note: If a contact is moved to the blacklist, then the call from this contact cannot get through. 1. Press Directory > Local Directory 2. Choose a group and press the Enter soft key. 3. Use the navigation key to highlight the one you want to move. Press Option soft key and scroll to Move to Blacklist. Press OK soft key. 4. A pop-up window will display asking whether to confirm moving the contact. 5. Press OK soft key to confirm the operation or press the Cancel soft key to return to the directory. l). Voic Press Menu > Messages > Voice Mail > View Voice Mail. Alternatively you may dial 1000 to access the Voic system at any time. The system will prompt for your password. Note: when accessing the voice mail system for the first time your password is your extension #. Change this to a 4-digit number you can easily recall. Edition Eleven Page 232 of 289

233 m). Transfer a call You may customize your phone so that incoming calls are transferred directly to the third party (another extension, mobile phone number, etc.) There are three ways to transfer the call: Blind Transfer, Attended Transfer and Semi-Attended Transfer. Blind Transfer via phone interface: 1. Press the TRAN Button or Tran soft key to put the caller on hold. Dial the new telephone number and press the Tran soft key to call out. Your call will turn to hold status and the LCD will display as Transferred. 2. After the call is answered, press the Cancel soft key to complete the transfer. 3. You will be disconnected from the call and the other parties will be able to talk. Attended Transfer via phone interface: 1. Press the TRAN Button or Tran soft key to put the caller on hold. Dial the new phone number and press the OK or SEND button to call out. 2. After the call is answered you will be able to talk to the new party without the caller on hold being able to hear the conversation. Press the TRAN button to complete the transfer. You will be disconnected from the call and the caller on hold will be able to talk to the transferred party. Semi-Attended Transfer via phone interface: 1. Press the TRAN button or Tran soft key to put the caller on hold. Dial a new number and press the OK or SEND button to call out. 2. While the new number is ringing, hang up or press the Transfer soft key. Your call will turn to hold status and the LCD will display as Transferred. 3. You will be disconnected from the call when the new caller answers the call. The on hold caller and new caller will be able to talk. n). Forwarding a call Calls may be forwarded to another phone number, cell phone or voic . Call forwarding can be configured in the following ways: Always: Incoming calls are immediately forwarded. Busy: Incoming calls are immediately forwarded when the phone is busy. No Answer: Incoming calls are forwarded when the phone is not answered after a specific period. To configure Forward option via the phone interface: 1. Press Menu soft key > Features > Call Forward to enter the configure page. Edition Eleven Page 233 of 289

234 2. Select one of three options: Always Forward, Busy Forward and No Answer Forward and enter the phone number you want to forward. 3. If you select No Answer Forward, you must also select After Ring Times option. 4. Press Save soft key to save the changes. o). Conference Calls You may establish a three-party conference. During the conversation three phone parties are able to communicate with each other. You must enable this option via web interface. To enable local conference via web interface: 1. Choose Account > Account X > Advance > Conference Type. From the pull-down menu choose Local Conf from the list. 2. Press Confirm button to save the change. Edition Eleven Page 234 of 289

235 Establishing a local conference: 1. Press the Conf soft key during an active call. 2. The first call is placed on hold. You will hear a dial tone. Dial the number to conference in, then press the Send soft key. 3. When the call is answered, you may have a private conversation at first and then press the CONF button. The conference call will include you and the other two parties. 4. During the conference, press the Split soft key to split the conference into two hold lines and press the Resume soft key to resume the chosen call respectively. 5. When you press the Hold key, the conference will be on hold. 6. Hang up to disconnect all parties. Edition Eleven Page 235 of 289

236 Establishing a network conference: To make a conference with more than three people, you can open the function of network conference. This function needs the server s support. If you enabled this function, you can put the meeting conference on the server. To enable network conference via web interface: 1. Choose Account > Account X > Advance > Conference Type. From the pull-down menu, choose Network Conf from the list. 2. Enter the Conference URI in the Conference URI field. 3. Press Confirm button to save the change. 4. Press the Conf soft key during an active call. 5. Dial the number to conference in, then press the Send soft key 6. When the call is answered, press the Conf soft key. 7. After starting a three-way conference, press Conf button to enter Conference dialing interface and invite another party to participate in the teleconference. 8. After starting conference, press Hold key to hold local call without influencing others in conference. Edition Eleven Page 236 of 289

237 23. Yealink SIP-T38G Telephone a). Making a Call You may make a phone call via the following devices: 1. Pick up the handset, icon will be shown in the idle screen. 2. Press the Speaker button, icon will be shown in the idle screen. 3. Press the Headset button if the headset is connected to the Headset port in advance. In the dial-up interface, the icon will be shown in the idle screen. Dial Number Directly: Dial the number. Press Send soft key. Dial from Pool: In dial-up interface, press Pool soft key. Use the Navigation keys to highlight your choice. Choose the corresponding option. Select a record, then press the Send/Dial button. Redial: Press Redial button to enter the Dialed Calls interface and choose a record to dial out. During the call, you may alternate between Headset, Handset and Speakerphone by pressing the corresponding buttons or picking up the handset. If you have registered more than one account, you can choose a certain account to make your call: 1. Press the Left/Right navigation key to choose a default account when your phone is in idle status. 2. In the dial-up interface, press the Line soft key to choose an account. Then press the Select soft key to confirm. 3. Press the three line keys on the keypad to activate the chosen account. b). Answering a Call To answer an incoming call, lift the handset. To answer using the speakerphone, press the Speaker button. To answer using the headset, press the Headset button. Edition Eleven Page 237 of 289

238 If you are on an active call, the LCD screen will display Incoming Call: #. Press the Answer soft key to answer the call or Reject soft key to refuse the call. Denying an incoming call: Press Reject soft key or X button to deny the incoming call directly. c). Do Not Disturb Press DND soft key to activate Do Not Disturb Mode. Further incoming calls will be rejected and the display will show the icon. Press DND soft key again to deactivate DND mode. d). Muting a call This function allows you to mute the microphone of the active audio device during a call. You cannot be heard by the other party. You can still hear all other parties while mute is enabled. When you press the X button, the conversation will be muted. To mute/resume a conversation: Press X button to mute the call during a conversation. The icon to unmute the call return to normal conversation. will be shown in the LCD. Press it again e). Putting a call on Hold This call function allows you to place an active call on hold. In this case your IP PBX might play a melody or message to the other party while waiting. Other calls can be received and made while having a call on hold. Edition Eleven Page 238 of 289

239 To hold/retrieve a call: 1. Press the Hold soft key to put your active call on hold. 2. During the call, there will be an audio tone every 30 seconds indicating a current call on hold. 3. If there is only one call on hold, press the Resume soft key or Hold soft key to retrieve the call. 4. If there is more than one call on hold, press the Up/Down navigation key to highlight the call, then press the Resume soft key or HOLD button to retrieve the call. f). Call Waiting To enable/disable Call Waiting via Phone interface: 1. Press Menu > Features > Call Waiting. 2. Use the navigation key or Switch soft key to enable/disable the call waiting option. 3. Use the navigation key or Switch soft key to enable/disable the Play Tone option. This option is used to define whether to play ring tones when there is an incoming call during an active call. 4. Press Save soft key to save the change, or Back soft key to return to the previous menu. g). DSS Keys The SIP-T38G phone has 10 Memory keys which can be configured up to 33 functions per key and it 6 line keys which can be configured up to 32 functions per key. Setting up DSS key via phone interface: 1. Press Menu > Features > DSS keys to enter into the configure page. 2. Choose one of the line (Memory) keys to be assigned. Edition Eleven Page 239 of 289

240 3. Choose the type, and then configure the corresponding contents. Assigning a key: Users can set a specific button ( # or * ) to activate as the send button. To set the send key via the IP phone interface: 1. Press Menu > Features > Key as Send to enter the configuration page. 2. Press the Switch soft key to choose a button you want to use as the send key: #, *, or disable this option. 3. Press the Save soft key to save the change. Assigning a Hot Line number: 1. Press Menu > Features > Hot Line to enter the configuration page. 2. Enter the hot line number and hot line delay time (for example, 10 seconds), then press the Save soft key to save the change. 3. When you pick up the handset or press the speaker button, it will dial the number automatically if you do not press any keys for 10 seconds. Edition Eleven Page 240 of 289

241 h). Anonymous Call 1. Press Menu > Features > Anonymous Call to enter the configuration page. 2. By using the Switch soft key, you can choose the Line ID. 3. Press the navigation key to enter and choose whether to enable the anonymous call function. This feature allows the subscriber to make a call with the blocked display of their calling identification information. 4. To use this function by server, please choose and enter the Call On Code and Call Off Code. When you choose to enable the anonymous call function on your IP phone, it will send information to the server. The server will enable/disable the anonymous call function for your IP phone automatically. 5. Press the navigation keys to enter and choose whether to enable the anonymous rejection function. The feature allows the subscriber to reject all calls from callers who have blocked the display of their calling identification information (calling number and calling name). 6. To use this function by server, please choose and enter the Reject On Code and Reject Off Code. When you choose to enable the Rejection option on your IP phone, it will send information to the server. The server will enable/disable the rejection anonymous call function for your IP phone automatically. 7. Press the Save soft key to save the changes. i). Auto Redial Auto redial is a telephone feature that redials a busy number in a fixed number of times before stopping. 1. Press Menu > Features > Auto Redial to enter the configuration page. 2. By using the Switch soft key, you may choose whether to enable the auto redial function. 3. Press the navigation key to choose and set the redial interval. It is measured by seconds. Edition Eleven Page 241 of 289

242 4. Press the navigation key to choose and set the redial times. 5. Press Save soft key to save the change. Note: When you dial a busy number after setting the auto redial function to Enable, the phone will pop up an Auto Redial window to ask whether you want to redial. If yes, press OK. If you do nothing in this interface for 5 seconds, it will automatically turn to the idle interface. j). Intercom 1. Press Menu > Features > Intercom to enter the configuration page. 2. Intercom Allow: To set whether to answer the incoming intercom calls. 3. Intercom Mute: To set whether to mute the incoming intercom calls automatically. 4. Intercom Tone: To set whether to play ring tones when there is incoming intercom calls to your extension. 5. Intercom Barge: To set whether to answer the incoming intercom calls during a conversation. If the option is enabled, when there are incoming intercom calls to your extension and if you are on an intercom conversation, it will refuse the call automatically or, it will put the current call on hold and put the incoming intercom call through. 6. Choose and set the different options by navigation key and the Switch soft key. 7. Press the Save soft key to save the change. k). Directory Adding a local group to the directory via Phone interface: 1. Press Directory > Local Directory to enter into the contacts page. 2. Press AddGroup soft key to enter into the Add Group page. 3. Enter the Group Name and choose the Ring. 4. Press the Save soft key to save. Edition Eleven Page 242 of 289

243 All the contacts will show on the Contacts group. For example: if you add a contact in AAA group and add another contact in BBB group, you can check the records in each group. You may also check all the records in Contacts group. Deleting a Group via Phone interface: 1. Press Directory > Local Directory to enter into the contacts page. 2. Choose a group, Press Option > Delete/Delete All Group soft key to delete this or all group. 3. A pop-up warning window will ask you to confirm deleting the group. 4. Press OK soft key to confirm the operation or press the Cancel soft key to return to the directory. Adding a contact to a local directory: 1. Press Directory > Local Directory 2. Choose a group and press the Enter soft key. 3. Press Add soft key, enter Name, Office, Mobile and Other phone number. Use the abc soft key to choose an input method like Numeric, Upper/Lower Case Alphanumeric. 4. If you want to assign a contact to a specific account, you can use navigation key to select desired account. 5. Choose and set a special ring tone for the contact. 6. Use the navigation key to select the group you want to assign. 7. Choose photo, then press Enter soft key to enter into the edit page. Use the navigation key to select a photo for this contact. Press OK soft key to confirm and return to the previous screen. 8. Press Save soft key to add the record to contacts. Edition Eleven Page 243 of 289

244 9. Press Save soft key to add the record to contacts or Back soft key to cancel. Editing a contact via Phone interface: 1. Press Directory > Local Directory 2. Choose a group, and press the Enter soft key. 3. Use the navigation key to highlight the contact you want to edit. Press Option > Detail and enter into the edit page. 4. Make the change. Press Save soft key to save the change or press Back soft key to return to the directory. Deleting a contact from the local directory: 1.Press Directory > Local Directory 2. Choose a group, and press the Enter soft key. 3. Use the navigation key to highlight the contact you want to delete. Press Option soft key, and scroll to Delete> Press OK soft key. 4. A warning window will pop up asking whether to confirm deleting the contact. 5. Press OK soft key to confirm the operation or press the Cancel soft key to return to the directory. Edition Eleven Page 244 of 289

245 Searching a contact in local directory: 1. Press Directory > Local Directory > Search to enter into the search page or choose a group and press the Enter soft key. Press the number keypad to enter into the search page directly. 2. The search interface will display where you may enter the contact you are searching for. Press the OK soft key. 3. The phone will display the contact. Moving a contact to blacklist: Note: If a contact is moved to the blacklist, then the call from this contact cannot get through. 1. Press Directory > Local Directory 2. Choose a group and press the Enter soft key. 3. Use the navigation key to highlight the one you want to move. Press Option soft key and scroll to Move to Blacklist. Press OK soft key. 4. A pop-up window will display asking whether to confirm moving the contact. 5. Press OK soft key to confirm the operation or press the Cancel soft key to return to the directory. Edition Eleven Page 245 of 289

246 l). Voic 1. Press Menu > Messages > Voice Mail > View Voice Mail. 2. You can view the list of new or old voice mail. 3. Choose the account, then press the Connect soft key to listen to new and old messages. Note: Before listening to voic , make sure the connecting code has been set on the phone. Alternatively you may dial 1000 to access the Voic system at any time. The system will prompt for your password. Note: when accessing the voice mail system for the first time your password is your extension #. Change this to a 4-digit number you can easily recall. m). SMS Viewing the SMS via Phone interface: 1. Press Menu > Messages > Text Message to enter the text message page. 2. Use the Up/Down navigation keys to highlight the options. You can read the message in the Inbox/Sentbox/Outbox/Draftbox. 3. Press Enter soft key. Use the Up/Down navigation keys to choose a message. 4. Press View soft key to read the message. Edition Eleven Page 246 of 289

247 Replying with a text message using SMS via Phone interface: 1. After viewing the message, press Reply soft key. Enter message. Use the abc soft key to change the Input Method. 2. Press Send soft key. You will need to choose an account which is used to send the message and the number you want to send the message to. 3. Press Send soft key to send the message or Back soft key to return to the previous menu. Editing a new message via the Phone interface: 1. Press Menu > Messages > Text Message > New Message to enter. 2. Edit the new message. Use the abc soft key to change the input method. 3. Press Send soft key. You will need to choose an account which is used to send the message and the number you want to send the message to. 4. Press Send soft key to send the message or Back soft key to return to the previous menu. Deleting the SMS message via the phone interface: 1. Choose a message you want to delete. Press Delete soft key. 3. Choose delete a message or delete all messages. Press OK soft key. 4. You will be prompted to confirm the delete operation. Press Yes soft key to delete the message or No soft key to return to the previous menu. Edition Eleven Page 247 of 289

248 n). Transfer a call You may customize your phone so that incoming calls are transferred directly to the third party (another extension, mobile phone number, etc.) There are three ways to transfer the call: Blind Transfer, Attended Transfer and Semi-Attended Transfer. Blind Transfer via phone interface: 1. Press the TRAN Button or Tran soft key to put the caller on hold. Dial the new telephone number and press the Tran soft key to call out. Your call will turn to hold status and the LCD will display as Transferred. 2. After the call is answered, press the Cancel soft key to complete the transfer. 3. You will be disconnected from the call and the other parties will be able to talk. Attended Transfer via phone interface: 1. Press the TRAN Button or Tran soft key to put the caller on hold. Dial the new phone number and press the OK or SEND button to call out. 2. After the call is answered you will be able to talk to the new party without the caller on hold being able to hear the conversation. Press the TRAN button to complete the transfer. You will be disconnected from the call and the caller on hold will be able to talk to the transferred party. Semi-Attended Transfer via phone interface: 1. Press the TRAN button or Tran soft key to put the caller on hold. Dial a new number and press the OK or SEND button to call out. 2. While the new number is ringing, hang up or press the Transfer soft key. Your call will turn to hold status and the LCD will display as Transferred. Edition Eleven Page 248 of 289

249 3. You will be disconnected from the call when the new caller answers the call. The on hold caller and new caller will be able to talk. o). Forwarding a call Calls may be forwarded to another phone number, cell phone or voic . Call forwarding can be configured in the following ways: Always: Incoming calls are immediately forwarded. Busy: Incoming calls are immediately forwarded when the phone is busy. No Answer: Incoming calls are forwarded when the phone is not answered after a specific period. To configure Forward option via the phone interface: 1. Press Menu soft key > Features > Call Forward to enter the configure page. 2. Select one of three options: Always Forward, Busy Forward and No Answer Forward and enter the phone number you want to forward. 3. If you select No Answer Forward, you must also select After Ring Times option. 4. If using this function by server, please enter the On Code and Off Code option. When you choose to enable the call forward function via your IP phone, it will send a message to the server which will turn on the function immediately. When there is call to the extension, the server will forward it to the set number automatically based on the forward type. The IP phone will no longer display the record in call history. 4. Press Save soft key to save the changes. p). Conference Calls You may establish a three-party conference. During the conversation three phone parties are able to communicate with each other. You must enable this option via web interface. Edition Eleven Page 249 of 289

250 To enable local conference via web interface: 1. Choose Account > Account X > Advance > Conference Type. From the pull-down menu choose Local Conf from the list. 2. Press Confirm button to save the change. Establishing a local conference: 1. Press the Conf soft key during an active call. 2. The first call is placed on hold. You will hear a dial tone. Dial the number to conference in, then press the Send soft key. 3. When the call is answered, you may have a private conversation at first and then press the CONF button. The conference call will include you and the other two parties. 4. During the conference, press the Split soft key to split the conference into two hold lines and press the Resume soft key to resume the chosen call respectively. 5. When you press the Hold key, the conference will be on hold. 6. Hang up to disconnect all parties. Edition Eleven Page 250 of 289

251 Establishing a network conference: To make a conference with more than three people, you can open the function of network conference. This function needs the server s support. If you enabled this function, you can put the meeting conference on the server. To enable network conference via web interface: 1. Choose Account > Account X > Advance > Conference Type. From the pull-down menu, choose Network Conf from the list. 2. Enter the Conference URI in the Conference URI field. 3. Press Confirm button to save the change. 4. Press the Conf soft key during an active call. 5. Dial the number to conference in, then press the Send soft key 6. When the call is answered, press the Conf soft key. 7. After starting a three-way conference, press Conf button to enter Conference dialing interface and invite another party to participate in the teleconference. 8. After starting conference, press Hold key to hold local call without influencing others in conference. Edition Eleven Page 251 of 289

252 24. Yealink EXP38 Expansion Module Expansion Module EXP38 is designed for connection to the Yealink T28P/T26P VoIP phone. Note: Before installation, be sure to unplug the power connector and the phone stand from the Yealink IP phone T28P. Place the telephone and the expansion module upside down on a soft surface so that you can read nameplates from the front. The expansion module must be placed to the left of the telephone. a). Connect to the phone Use the connecting sheet and screw to connect the EXP38 to the IP phone. Edition Eleven Page 252 of 289

253 b). Connect to the next module Follow the same step to connect the next expansion module Note: The T28P phone can support up to six expansion modules. If you use more than three expansion modules, you will need to connect an additional power adapter to any one of the expansion modules. c). Connect cords Plug the connecting cord into the Ext jack of the IP phone (the next port to the Ext in jack of the first module). To connect more than one module, plug another cord into the Ext out jack and the other port to the Ext in jack of the second module. Edition Eleven Page 253 of 289

254 Note: Users can connect up to six modules. Connect the Ext in port of the previous module and the Ext out port of the next module with a connecting cord. Attach the stand and power adapter. Connect handset and headset to use. d). Configuration The expansion module EXP38 has 38 programmable keys that can be configured to perform up to 17 functions per key. You can use the web interface or the IP phone user interface to configure key functions. The following list shows the functions you can set on the programmable keys and provides a description for each function. The default configuration for each key is N/A meaning the key has not been set for any functions. N/A- Default configuration indicating the key has not been set for any functions. BLF (Busy Lamp Field)-You can configure the key for Busy Lamp Field (BLF) use which allows you to monitor the status (idle, ringing, or busy) of other SIP accounts. User can dial out on a BLF configured key on the expansion module EXP38. Speed Dial- You can configure the key as a simplified speed dial key. This key function allows you to quickly dial often used numbers. Intercom- You can configure the key for Intercom mode useful as a quick access to connect to the operator or other office personnel. URL- By pressing the URL key, you can send HTTP requests to a web server. Share Line- Share Line Appearance (SLA) feature allows subscribers to share SIP lines. SLA also provides status monitoring of the shared line. When a user places an outgoing call, all members belonging to that particular SLA group are notified of this usage and are blocked from using this line appearance until the line goes back to idle state or when the call is placed on hold. Similarly all members of the SLA group are notified of an incoming call and the call can be picked up on a line appearance associated with the SLA extension. Conference-You may configure the programmable key to be used as a conference key. This key allows a user on a call to conference another party at a pre-defined number while remaining in the current call. Forward-By pressing this key under the idle status, the IP phone will turn to the Always Forward page and you can set the Forward to number. When there is any call to the extension number it will be forwarded to the set number automatically. Edition Eleven Page 254 of 289

255 Transfer-You may configure the transfer key to perform the Blind/Attended Transfer. Hold-You can use this key to hold and retrieve a call during the conversation. DND (Do Not Disturb)- Pressing the key will activate the DND function immediately. Press it again to deactivate DND mode. Redial-By pressing this key under the idle status, it will retrieve the last dialed number. You may then choose a special line to call out by pressing the line keys. Call Return-Pressing this key will dial out the last phone call you received. Group Pickup-By configuring a Group Pickup key, you can specify the extension you want to monitor. When the monitored extension receives a call, you press the key to pick up the call. If the monitored extension receives multiple incoming calls simultaneously, the IP Phone UI displays a list of incoming calls. You can select a call from this list and are connected to the call. Call Park-This feature enables you to put a call on hold at one telephone set and continue the conversation from any other telephone set. The call park feature is activated by pressing a pre-programmed button or a special sequence of buttons. This transfers the current conversation to an unused extension number and immediately puts the conversation on hold. The telephone system will then display the extension number of the parked call so it can be retrieved later. Group Listening-This key enables the Speakerphone and Handset/Headset mode at the same time. It is suitable for group conversation that has more than one person near the telephone. You are able to speak and listen using handset/headset while other people nearby can speak and listen using the speakerphone. Return to previous mode by pressing the key again. SMS (Short Message Service)-Pressing this key will access the SMS text messaging feature. Voic -Pressing this key will access the Voic feature. Custom-Will allow you to send out the desired DTMF number during the conversation. The number needs to be set in advance. Public Hold-This key can be configured as a public hold key. During a conversation, all members belonging to that particular SLA group can use this key to hold or retrieve a call. Private Hold-This key can be configured as a private hold key. During a conversation, all members belonging to that particular SLA group can use this key to hold the call, but only the initiator can retrieve the call. Note: Quick access features like Intercom and Voic must first be configured on your PBX in order to work on your phone. See your system administrator for more information. e). Programming Keys BLF (Busy Lamp Field): 1. Choose Phone > EXT Key and choose one of the keys to assign. From pull-down menu in the Type field, choose BLF from the list. Edition Eleven Page 255 of 289

256 2. In the "Line" field, select a line to apply this key and enter the extension number you want to monitor. 3. Press Confirm button to save the changes. Note: In the Web interface, you may also set the pickup number to activate the pickup function. For example, if you set the BLF number as 212, and the pickup number is *83, when there is an incoming call to 212, press the BLF key and it will call *83 automatically to pickup the incoming call on 212. Speed Dial: 1. Choose Phone > EXT Key and choose one of the keys to assign. From the pull-down menu in the Type field, choose Speed Dial from the list. 2. In the "Line" field, select a line to apply this key. In the Number field enter the extension number you want to perform Speed Dial. 3. Press Confirm button to save the changes. Intercom: 1. Choose Phone > EXT Key and choose one of the keys to assign. From the pull-down menu in the Type field choose Intercom from the list. 2. In the "Line" field, select a line to apply this key. The default is Auto which will automatically match the account. Enter the extension number you want to intercom. 3. Press Confirm button to save the changes. Note: Your VoIP PBX must support this feature. Also, make sure the intercom extension enables the Auto- Edition Eleven Page 256 of 289

257 answer function. URL: 1. Choose Phone > EXT Key and choose one of the keys to assign. From the pull-down menu in the Type field, choose URL from the list. 2. Enter the extension number you want to set as URL in the Extension field. 3. Press Confirm button to save the changes. Share Line: 1. Choose Phone > EXT Key and choose one of the keys to assign. From the pull-down menu in the Type field, choose Share Line from the list. 2. In the "Line" field, select a line to apply this key and enter the extension number you want to set as SLA in the Extension field. 3. Press Confirm button to save the changes. Conference: 1. Choose Phone > EXT Key and choose one of the keys to assign. From the pull-down menu in the Type field, choose KeyEvent from the list. In the Mode field, open the pull-down menu and choose Conference. 2. Press Confirm button to save the changes. Forward: 1. Choose Phone > EXT Key and choose one of the keys to assign. From the pull-down menu in the Type field, choose KeyEvent from the list. In the Mode field, open the pull-down menu and choose Forward. 2. Enter the extension number you want to forward to in the Extension field. 3. Press Confirm button to save the changes. Transfer: 1. Choose Phone > EXT Key and choose one of the keys to assign. From the pull-down menu in the Type field, choose KeyEvent from the list. In the Mode field, open the pull-down menu and choose Transfer. 2. Press Confirm button to save the changes. Hold: 1. Choose Phone > EXT Key and choose one of the keys to assign. From the pull-down menu in the Type field, choose KeyEvent from the list. In the Mode field, open the pull-down menu and choose Hold. 2. Press Confirm button to save the changes. DND: 1. Choose Phone > EXT Key and choose one of the keys to assign. From the pull-down menu in the Type Edition Eleven Page 257 of 289

258 field, choose KeyEvent from the list. In the Mode field, open the pull-down menu and choose DND. 2. Press Confirm button to save the changes. Redial: 1. Choose Phone > EXT Key and choose one of the keys to assign. From the pull-down menu in the Type field, choose KeyEvent from the list. In the Mode field, open the pull-down menu and choose Redial. 2. Press Confirm button to save the changes. Call Return: 1. Choose Phone > EXT Key and choose one of the keys to assign. From the pull-down menu in the Type field, choose KeyEvent from the list. In the Mode field, open the pull-down menu and choose Call Return. 2. Press Confirm button to save the changes. Group Pickup: 1. Choose Phone > EXT Key and choose one of the keys to assign. From the pull-down menu in the Type field, choose KeyEvent from the list. In the Mode field, open the pull-down menu and choose Group Pickup. 2. In the "Line" field, select a line to apply this key and enter the extension number you want to pickup. 3. Press Confirm button to save the changes. Call Park: 1. Choose Phone > EXT Key and choose one of the keys to assign. From the pull-down menu in the Type field, choose KeyEvent from the list. In the Mode field, open the pull-down menu and choose Call Park. 2. In the "Line" field, select a line to apply this key and enter the extension number you want to park. 3. Press Confirm button to save the changes. Group Listening: 1. Choose Phone > EXT Key and choose one of the keys to assign. From the pull-down menu in the Type field, choose KeyEvent from the list. In the Mode field, open the pull-down menu and choose Group Listening. 2. Press Confirm button to save the changes. SMS (Short Message Service): 1. Choose Phone > EXT Key and choose one of the keys to assign. From the pull-down menu in the Type field, choose KeyEvent from the list. In the Mode field, open the pull-down menu and choose SMS. 2. Press Confirm button to save the changes. Voic 1. Choose Phone > EXT Key and choose one of the keys to assign. From the pull-down menu in the Type field, choose KeyEvent from the list. In the Mode field, open the pull-down menu and choose Voic . Edition Eleven Page 258 of 289

259 2. In the "Line" field, select a line to apply this key and enter the extension number you want to set as the voice mail box. 3. Press Confirm button to save the changes. Custom: 1. Choose Phone > EXT Key and choose one of the keys to assign. From the pull-down menu in the Type field, choose KeyEvent from the list. In the Mode field, open the pull-down menu and choose Custom. 2. In the Extension field, enter the specific number. 3. Press Confirm button to save the changes. Note: If you connect more than one expansion module EXP38, you can choose the Extension number in the Extension Key field via the web interface. Public Hold: 1. Choose Phone > EXT Key and choose one of the keys to assign. From the pull-down menu in the Type field, choose KeyEvent from the list. In the Mode field, open the pull-down menu and choose Public Hold. 2. Press Confirm button to save the changes. Private Hold: 1. Choose Phone > EXT Key and choose one of the keys to assign. From the pull-down menu in the Type field, choose KeyEvent from the list. In the Mode field, open the pull-down menu and choose Private Hold. 2. Press Confirm button to save the changes. Edition Eleven Page 259 of 289

260 25. Yealink EXP39 Expansion Module Expansion Module EXP39 is designed for connection to the Yealink T26P/T28P/T38G VoIP phones. Note: Before installation, be sure to unplug the power connector and the phone stand from the Yealink IP phone. Place the telephone and the expansion module upside down on a soft surface so that you can read nameplates from the front. The expansion module must be placed to the left of the telephone. a). Connect to the phone Use the connecting sheet and screw to connect the EXP39 to the IP phone. Edition Eleven Page 260 of 289

261 b). Connect to the next module Follow the same step to connect the next expansion module Note: The phone can support up to six expansion modules. If you use more than three expansion modules, you will need to connect an additional power adapter to any one of the expansion modules. c). Connect cords Plug the connecting cord into the Ext jack of the IP phone (the next port to the Ext in jack of the first module). To connect more than one module, plug another cord into the Ext out jack and the other port to the Ext in jack of the second module. Edition Eleven Page 261 of 289

262 Note: Users can connect up to six modules. Connect the Ext in port of the previous module and the Ext out port of the next module with a connecting cord. Attach the stand and power adapter. Connect handset and headset to use. d). Configuration The expansion module EXP39 has 38 programmable keys that can be configured to perform up to 28 functions per key and it has a large LCD. You can use the web interface or the IP phone user interface to configure key functions. The following list shows the functions you can set on the programmable keys and provides a description for each function. The default configuration for each key is N/A meaning the key has not been set for any functions. N/A- Default configuration indicating the key has not been set for any functions. Switch-The switch feature allows you to cycle through two screens and have up to 40 programmable keys. Setting key1 and key21 as Switch, allows up to the maximum number of configurable keys. Setting key1 as another function allows only 20 configurable keys. Conference-You may configure the programmable key to be used as a conference key. This key allows a user on a call to conference another party at a pre-defined number while remaining in the current call. Forward-By pressing this key under the idle status, when there is any call to the extension number it will be forwarded to the set number automatically. Transfer-You may configure the transfer key to perform the Blind/Semi-Attend Transfer/Attended Transfer. Hold-You can use this key to hold and retrieve a call during the conversation. DND (Do Not Disturb)- Pressing the key will activate the DND function immediately. Press it again to deactivate DND mode. Redial-By pressing this key under the idle status, it will retrieve the last dialed number. You may then choose a special line to call out by pressing the line keys. Call Return-Pressing this key will dial out the last phone call you received. SMS (Short Message Service)-Pressing this key will access the SMS text-messaging feature. Edition Eleven Page 262 of 289

263 Pick Up- Configuring a Pick Up specifies the extension you want to monitor. When the monitored extension receives a call, you can press this key to pick up the incoming call. Call Park-This feature enables you to put a call on hold at one telephone set and continue the conversation from any other telephone set. The call park feature is activated by pressing a pre-programmed button or a special sequence of buttons. This transfers the current conversation to an unused extension number and immediately puts the conversation on hold. The telephone system will then display the extension number of the parked call so it can be retrieved later. DTMF-You are able to send out the desired DTMF number during the conversation. The number needs to be set in advance. Voic -Pressing this key will access the Voic feature. Speed Dial-You can configure the key as a simplified speed dial key. This key function allows you to quickly dial often-used numbers. Intercom-You can configure the key for Intercom mode useful as a quick access to connect to the operator or other office personnel. Line-You can set these keys as line keys to activate the user accounts. BLF (Busy Lamp Field)-You can configure the key for Busy Lamp Field (BLF) use, which allows you to monitor the status (idle, ringing, or busy) of other SIP accounts. User can dial out on a BLF configured key on the expansion module EXP39. URL- By pressing the URL key, you can send HTTP requests to a web server. Group Listening-This key enables the Speakerphone and Handset/Headset mode at the same time. It is suitable for group conversation that has more than one person near the telephone. You are able to speak and listen using handset/headset while other people nearby can speak and listen using the speakerphone. Return to previous mode by pressing the key again. Public Hold-This key can be configured as a public hold key. During a conversation, all members belonging to that particular SLA group can use this key to hold or retrieve a call. Private Hold-This key can be configured as a private hold key. During a conversation, all members belonging to that particular SLA group can use this key to hold the call, but only the initiator can retrieve the call. Share Line- Share Line Appearance (SLA) feature allows subscribers to share SIP lines. SLA also provides status monitoring of the shared line. When a user places an outgoing call, all members belonging to that particular SLA group are notified of this usage and are blocked from using this line appearance until the line goes back to idle state or when the call is placed on hold. Similarly all members of the SLA group are notified of an incoming call and the call can be picked up on a line appearance associated with the SLA extension. XML Phonebook-By pressing the XML PhoneBook function key, the phone will automatically download the corresponding phone book from the server into the XML PhoneBook page. Group Pickup-By configuring a Group Pickup key, you can specify the extension you want to monitor. When the monitored extension receives a call, you press the key to pick up the call. If the monitored extension receives multiple incoming calls simultaneously, the IP Phone UI displays a list of incoming Edition Eleven Page 263 of 289

264 calls. You can select a call from this list and are connected to the call. Paging-When you press this key, the phone will dial the number out directly. Record-The function allows the phone call to be recorded. XML Browser-A simple browser function, which is based on xml language and http/https service. Users can use tools such as PHP, JavaScript, etc., in accordance with the established syntax, to generate server-side functions dynamically to meet the needs of the user xml file and download it to the sip phone by http/https. By using xml browser, you can personalize features on your phone, such as weather information, stock information, date of inquiry, access to address book, Google search, news browsing, playing music, configuration of the terminal parameters and other functions. Hot Desking-Hot Desking is regularly used in places where not all the employees are in the office at the same time. This feature allows accounts to login or logout in an IP phone. URL Record-You can set this key as URL Record, which will record the call when you press the key. Note: Quick access features like Intercom and Voic must first be configured on your PBX in order to work on your phone. See your system administrator for more information. e). Programming Keys Switch: 1. Choose Phone > EXT Key and choose one of the keys to assign. From pull-down menu in the Type field, choose Switch from the list. 2. Fill in the desired label name. 3. Press Confirm button to save the changes. 4. The key on the LCD will display the name you filled in, otherwise it will display the default icon or name. 5. The Switch default display is List1. 6. If key21 only has Switch function, the Switch default display is List2. Edition Eleven Page 264 of 289

265 Conference: 1. Choose Phone > EXT Key and choose one of the keys to assign. From the pull-down menu in the Type field, choose KeyEvent from the list. In the Mode field, open the pull-down menu and choose Conference. 2. Fill in the desired label name. 3. Press Confirm button to save the changes. 4. The key on the LCD will display the name you filled in, otherwise the LCD will display the default icon or name. 5. The Conference default display is CONF. Forward: 1. Choose Phone > EXT Key and choose one of the keys to assign. From the pull-down menu in the Type field, choose Forward from the list and enter the number you want to forward in the value field. 2. Fill in the desired label name. 3. Press Confirm button to save the changes. 4. The key on the LCD will display the name you filled in, otherwise the LCD will display the default icon or name. 5. The Forward default display is FWD. Transfer: 1. Choose Phone > EXT Key and choose one of the keys to assign. From the pull-down menu in the Type field, choose Transfer. 2. Fill in the desired label name. Edition Eleven Page 265 of 289

266 3. Press Confirm button to save the changes. 4. The key on the LCD will display the name you filled in, otherwise the LCD will display the default icon or name. 5. The Forward default display is TRAN. Hold: 1. Choose Phone > EXT Key and choose one of the keys to assign. From the pull-down menu in the Type field, choose Hold from the list. 2. Fill in the desired label name. 3. Press Confirm button to save the changes. 4. The key on the LCD will display the name you filled in, otherwise the LCD will display the default icon or name. 5. The Hold default display is HOLD. DND: 1. Choose Phone > EXT Key and choose one of the keys to assign. From the pull-down menu in the Type field, choose DND from the list. 2. Fill in the desired label name. 3. Press Confirm button to save the changes. 4. The key on the LCD will display the name you filled in, otherwise the LCD will display the default icon or name. 5. The DND default display is DND. Redial: 1. Choose Phone > EXT Key and choose one of the keys to assign. From the pull-down menu in the Type field, choose Redial from the list. 2. Fill in the desired label name. 3. Press Confirm button to save the changes. 4. The key on the LCD will display the name you filled in, otherwise the LCD will display the default icon or name. 5. The Redial default display is Redial. Call Return: Edition Eleven Page 266 of 289

267 1. Choose Phone > EXT Key and choose one of the keys to assign. From the pull-down menu in the Type field, choose Call Return from the list. 2. Fill in the desired label name. 3. Press Confirm button to save the changes. 4. The key on the LCD will display the name you filled in, otherwise the LCD will display the default icon or name. 5. The Call Return default display is Call Return. SMS: 1. Choose Phone > EXT Key and choose one of the keys to assign. From the pull-down menu in the Type field, choose SMS from the list. 2. Fill in the desired label name. 3. Press Confirm button to save the changes. 4. The key on the LCD will display the name you filled in, otherwise the LCD will display the default icon or name. 5. The SMS default display is SMS. Pick Up 1. Choose Phone > EXT Key and choose one of the keys to assign. From the pull-down menu in the Type field, choose Pick Up from the list and enter the number you want to pick up in the value field. 2. Fill in the desired label name. 3. In the "Line" field, select a line to apply this key. 4. Press Confirm button to save the changes. 5. The key on the LCD will display the name you filled in, otherwise the LCD will display the default icon or name. 6. The Pick Up default display is Pick Up. Call Park: 1. Choose Phone > EXT Key and choose one of the keys to assign. From the pull-down menu in the Type field, choose Call Park from the list and enter the number you want to park in the value field. 2. Fill in the desired label name. 3. In the "Line" field, select a line to apply this key. 4. Press Confirm button to save the changes. 5. The key on the LCD will display the name you filled in, otherwise the LCD will display the default icon or name. Edition Eleven Page 267 of 289

268 6. The Call Park default display is the icon and Call Park. DTMF: 1. Choose Phone > EXT Key and choose one of the keys to assign. From the pull-down menu in the Type field, choose DTMF from the list and enter the character you want to send out during the conversation in the value field. 2. Fill in the desired label name. 3. Press Confirm button to save the changes. 4. The key on the LCD will display the name you filled in, otherwise the LCD will display the default icon or name. 5. The DTMF default display is DTMF. Voice Mail: 1. Choose Phone > EXT Key and choose one of the keys to assign. From the pull-down menu in the Type field, choose Voice Mail from the list and enter the number you want to set as the voice mail box in the value field. 2. Fill in the desired label name. 3. In the "Line" field, select a line to apply this key. 4. Press Confirm button to save the changes. 5. The key on the LCD will display the name you filled in, otherwise the LCD will display the default icon or name. 6. The Voice Mail default display is Voice Mail. Speed Dial: 1. Choose Phone > EXT Key and choose one of the keys to assign. From the pull-down menu in the Type field, choose Speed Dial from the list and enter the number you want to dial out directly in the value field. 2. Fill in the desired label name. 3. In the "Line" field, select a line to apply this key. 4. Press Confirm button to save the changes. 5. The key on the LCD will display the name you filled in, otherwise the LCD will display the default icon or name. 6. The Speed Dial default display is the icon and the content of the value. Intercom: 1. Choose Phone > EXT Key and choose one of the keys to assign. From the pull-down menu in the Type field choose Intercom from the list and enter the feature code and number in the value field you want to set as intercom. Edition Eleven Page 268 of 289

269 2. Fill in the desired label name. 3. In the "Line" field, select a line to apply this key. 4. Press Confirm button to save the changes. 5. The key on the LCD will display the name you filled in, otherwise the LCD will display the default icon or name. 6. The Intercom default display is Intercom. Note: Your VoIP PBX must support this feature. Also, make sure the intercom extension enables the Autoanswer function. Line: 1. Choose Phone > EXT Key and choose one of the keys to assign. From the pull-down menu in the Type field choose Line from the list and choose the corresponding line. 2. Press Confirm button to save the changes. 3. The key on the LCD default display is the icon. BLF: 1. Choose Phone > EXT Key and choose one of the keys to assign. From pull-down menu in the Type field, choose BLF from the list and enter the number in the value field you want to monitor. 2. Fill in the desired label name. 3. In the "Line" field, select a line to apply this key and enter the feature codes in the extension field. 4. Press Confirm button to save the changes. 5. The key on the LCD will display the name you filled in, otherwise the LCD will display the default icon or name. 6. The BLF default display is the icon and BLF: the content of the value Note: Please contact your system administrator for more information about the feature codes. URL: 1. Choose Phone > EXT Key and choose one of the keys to assign. From the pull-down menu in the Type field, choose URL from the list and enter the URL you want to set in the Value field. 2. Fill in the desired label name. 3. Press Confirm button to save the changes. 4. The key on the LCD will display the name you filled in, otherwise the LCD will display the default icon or name. 5. The URL default display is the content of the value. Edition Eleven Page 269 of 289

270 Group Listening: 1. Choose Phone > EXT Key and choose one of the keys to assign. From the pull-down menu in the Type field, choose Group Listening from the list. 2. Fill in the desired label name. 3. Press Confirm button to save the changes. 4. The key on the LCD will display the name you filled in, otherwise the LCD will display the default icon or name. 5. The Group Listening default display is Group Listening. Public Hold: 1. Choose Phone > EXT Key and choose one of the keys to assign. From the pull-down menu in the Type field, choose Public Hold from the list. 2. Fill in the desired label name. 3. Press Confirm button to save the changes. 4. The key on the LCD will display the name you filled in, otherwise the LCD will display the default icon or name. 5. The Public Hold default display is Public Hold. Private Hold: 1. Choose Phone > EXT Key and choose one of the keys to assign. From the pull-down menu in the Type field, choose Private Hold from the list. 2. Fill in the desired label name. 3. Press Confirm button to save the changes. 4. The key on the LCD will display the name you filled in, otherwise the LCD will display the default icon or name. 5. The Private Hold default display is Private Hold. Shared Line: 1. Choose Phone > EXT Key and choose one of the keys to assign. From the pull-down menu in the Type field, choose Shared Line from the list and enter the number in value field you want to set as a shared line. 2. Fill in the desired label name. 3. In the "Line" field, select a line to apply this key. 4. Press Confirm button to save the changes. 5. The key on the LCD will display the name you filled in, otherwise the LCD will display the default icon or name. Edition Eleven Page 270 of 289

271 6. The Shared Line default display is Shared Line. XML PhoneBook: 1. Choose Phone > EXT Key and choose one of the keys to assign. From the pull-down menu in the Type field, choose XML PhoneBook from the list. 2. Fill in the desired label name. 3. In the "Line" field, select a PhoneBook to apply this key. 4. Press Confirm button to save the changes. 5. The key on the LCD will display the name you filled in, otherwise the LCD will display the default icon or name. 6. The XML PhoneBook default display is XML PhoneBook. Group Pickup: 1. Choose Phone > EXT Key and choose one of the keys to assign. From the pull-down menu in the Type field, choose Group Pickup from the list and enter the number you want to set as Group Pickup in the value field. 2. Fill in the desired label name. 3. In the "Line" field, select a line to apply this key. 4. Press Confirm button to save the changes. 5. The key on the LCD will display the name you filled in, otherwise the LCD will display the default icon or name. 6. The Group Pickup default display is Group Pickup. Paging: 1. Choose Phone > EXT Key and choose one of the keys to assign. From the pull-down menu in the Type field, choose Paging from the list and enter the number you want to dial out directly in the value field. 2. Fill in the desired label name. 3. In the "Line" field, select a line to apply this key. 4. Press Confirm button to save the changes. 5. The key on the LCD will display the name you filled in, otherwise the LCD will display the default icon or name. 6. The Paging default display is Paging. Record: 1. Choose Phone > EXT Key and choose one of the keys to assign. From the pull-down menu in the Type field, choose Record from the list. Edition Eleven Page 271 of 289

272 2. Fill in the desired label name. 3. Press Confirm button to save the changes. 4. The key on the LCD will display the name you filled in, otherwise the LCD will display the default icon or name. 5. The Record default display is Record. XML Browser: 1. Choose Phone > EXT Key and choose one of the keys to assign. From the pull-down menu in the Type field, choose XML Browser from the list and enter the URL you want to set as XML Browser in the Value Field. 2. Fill in the desired label name. 3. Press Confirm button to save the changes. 4. The key on the LCD will display the name you filled in, otherwise the LCD will display the default icon or name. 5. The XML Browser default display is XML Browser. Hot Desking: 1. Choose Phone > EXT Key and choose one of the keys to assign. From the pull-down menu in the Type field, choose Hot Desking from the list. 2. In the "value" field, enter the URL address in the input frame to active the advanced mode or you can leave it black to active the base mode. 3. Fill in the desired label name. 4. Press Confirm button to save the changes. 5. The key on the LCD will display the name you filled in, otherwise the LCD will display the default icon or name. 6. The Hot Desking default display is Hot Desking. URL Record: 1. Choose Phone > EXT Key and choose one of the keys to assign. From the pull-down menu in the Type field, choose URL Record from the list and enter the URL you want to set in the Value Field. 2. Fill in the desired label name. 3. Press Confirm button to save the changes. 4. The key on the LCD will display the name you filled in, otherwise the LCD will display the default icon or name. 5. The URL Record default display is URL Record. Edition Eleven Page 272 of 289

273 26. Analog Phones (Note) Operation may vary depending upon phone type / manufacturer. a). Answering a Call Using the Handset: 1. Follow the manufacturer s instructions. Using Hands-Free Speakerphone Mode: 2. Follow the manufacturer s instructions if this feature is available. Using the (optional) Headset: 3. Follow the manufacturers instructions if this feature is available, b). Making a Call Using the handset: 1. Follow the manufacturer s instructions. Using Hands Free Speaker Phone Mode: 2. Follow the manufacturer s instructions if this feature is available. Using the (optional) Headset: 4. Follow the manufacturer s instructions if this feature is available. Redial Last Number: 5. Follow the manufacturer s instructions. Call Lists: 6. Follow the manufacturer s instructions if this feature is available. c). Microphone Mute 1. Follow the manufacturer s instructions. d). Holding a Call 1. Pressing Flash momentarily (if available) on many analog phones will place your caller on hold. The caller on hold will hear Music or Message on hold if enabled on your system. Edition Eleven Page 273 of 289

274 26. Analog Phones (contd) e). Transferring a Call Blind Transfer (Transfer the call to another party without any announcement): 1. During a call, press Flash (if available) to receive dial tone. 2. Your caller will be placed on hold and will hear Music or Message on hold if enabled on your system. 3. Dial the number you require. 4. Wait until you hear ringing tone then hang up to blind transfer the call. Transfer (Announced): 1. During a call, press Flash (if available) to receive dial tone. 2. Your caller will be placed on hold and will hear Music or Message on hold if enabled on your system. 3. Dial the number you require. 4. When the called party answers announce the call. 5. Hang up to transfer the call. f). Ending a Call 1. Follow the manufacturer s instructions. g). Creating a 3 Party Conference Call 1. To create a conference with two other parties using the local conferencing feature (if available). 2. With an incoming call on your phone or a call you have made, press Flash (if available) to receive dial tone. 3. The active call is placed on hold and the caller will hear Music or Message on hold if enabled on your system. 4. Dial the phone number of the second party. 5. When the second party answers, press Flash (if available) again to join all parties in the Conference. h). Volume Controls 1. Follow the manufacturer s instructions. i). Missed Call Display 1. Follow the manufacturer s instructions. j). Do Not Disturb Feature not supported. Edition Eleven Page 274 of 289

275 26. Analog Phones (contd) k). Changing Ringtones 1. Follow the manufacturer s instructions. l). Voic Access 1. Follow the manufacturer s instructions. 2. When you receive new voic stutter dial town will be heard. Some phone types may also support visual indication that voic is present. 3. To listen to voice messages dial The system will prompt for your password. (Note) as a new user accessing your mailbox for the first time, your password will be the same as your extension number. You will be guided through a short setup process including a password change. Set a password that is different to the extension number. See section Setting up your Voic . m). Speed Dials Feature not supported via Star2Star web portal. See manufacturer s instruction for local phone directory storage if available. n). Call Park 1. To park a call and retrieve from a different phone perform an attended (Announced) transfer to a. See section Transferring a Call 2. The system will play back a retrieval code ( ). a. The system provides up to 99 park positions 3. When the caller is Parked they will hear Message / Music on hold if enabled on your system. 4. To retrieve the call, dial the retrieval code to reconnect to the call. 5. If the call remains parked for longer than the system timeout (see On-Hold Options in the Portal Advanced Settings) the call will ring back on the originating extension. Edition Eleven Page 275 of 289

276 ***Star2Star System Features*** 27. Call Pickup 1. To pick up a call ringing a specific phone that is not ringing as part of a Ring Group, dial *8xxx (xxx being the extension of the ringing phone). 2. For example your neighbor s phone extension 112 is ringing. You would dial *8112 to pickup that call. 3. To pick up a call on any ringing phone dial * Intercom 1. To intercom (directly connect through the phones speaker) to another extension dial 7xxx (xxx being the extension you wish to connect to). 2. For example to directly connect to your neighbor s phone extension 112, you would need to dial The extension you dial will ring once and then automatically answer. 4. Your voice will be heard through the phone speaker. 5. You may also intercom to a remote extension using the same 7xxx format. 6. You can intercom across multiple Star2Star system locations. See section Inter-Location Dialing. Use the following format to dial <location prefix>7<extension> (eg: ) where 21 is the location prefix for another location associated with your system and 7105 to intercom with extension 105. (Note) Feature not available on S2S 3000 Softphone, snom m3 IP DECT wireless phone, Cisco 7940 / 7960 phones or analog phones. 29. Paging 1. Your Star2Star system has the ability to page small groups of extension users approximately 5 7. (Note) with requirements for larger paging groups Star2Star recommends the use of the snom PA1 device (see Section 9. snom Phones PA1 Paging Device) or overhead paging that can be accessed via an analog extension on your system. Contact your Dealer or Star2Star for details. 2. This feature creates the same result described in Section Intercom. However it applies to a number of extensions placed in a Paging Group. 3. Dial the 3 digit Paging Group Internal Direct Dial Number [xxx] to use the feature. Contact your system Administrator or Dealer for details of the Paging Group setup on your system. 4. Extensions in the Paging Group will ring once and then automatically answer. 5. Your voice will be heard through the phone external speaker. 6. Remember to end the call when paging is complete. 7. A paging group Internal Direct Dial number can be entered as a valid speed dial entry. See section Speed Dials. (Note) Feature not available on StarLite ipbx, S2S 3000 Softphone, snom m3 IP DECT wireless phone, Cisco 7940 / 7960 phones or analog phones. Edition Eleven Page 276 of 289

277 ***Star2Star System Features*** (contd) 30. Direct Dial to Voic 1. To leave a voic for another user without ringing their phone or transferring a call directly to a person s voic , dial 6xxx (xxx being the extension to send the voic to). You can Direct Dial to Voic across multiple Star2Star system locations. See section Inter-Location Dialing. Use the following format to dial <location prefix>6<extension> (eg: ) where 21 is the location prefix for another location associated with your system and 6105 to leave a voic directly without ringing the phone. 31. Setting up your Voic 1. Follow the instructions in Voic Access for your specific phone type to access the Voic system on your phone for the first time. 2. Enter your extension number when prompted by the system for your password. When accessing your voic for the first time your password will be the same as your extension number. 3. The system will prompt you with Welcome to Star2Star Voic . First I will guide you through a short setup process. 4. The system will then prompt you to change your password Enter your password followed by the # key. 5. Enter a new 4 digit password that you can easily remember. Do not use your extension number as this will restart the initial setup process again. 6. The system will prompt you to re enter the new password again to validate. 7. (Note) Users that have been configured with Portal access can log in to the Star2Star Portal, select CONFIGURATION and change their Voic password in the I N D I V I D U A L P H O N E S E T T I N G S section. Select the Voic link to display all options for Voic . Select the Change your voic PIN option to change your password. If you want to reset the voic box for a new user so that it will prompt them to enter a PIN and create a new greeting, set the PIN to be the same as the extension. 8. If you do not have a login please contact your System Administrator or Dealer. 9. The system will prompt you to record your name After the tone say your name then press the # key. 10. When you press the # key after speaking your name, the system will provide you with 3 options: Press 1 to accept the recording Press 2 to listen to the recording Press 3 to rerecord your name 11. Select option 0 to record an unavailable message, record your name, record a temporary greeting or change your password. 12. (Note) Your extension can be configured without the Voic feature. Please contact your System Administrator or Dealer if that option is required. (Note) the system automatically deletes messages that are more than 90 days old. If you wish to keep messages indefinitely save them in the Archived folder (4). Messages in the Archived folder are not automatically purged. Edition Eleven Page 277 of 289

278 32. Voic Guide Voic Guide Access internally Access your mailbox by pressing the Messages/Msgs/MSG key or by dialing 1000 Enter your password Access externally (if configured on your system) i.e. An option on your menu or separate number Dial the designated number Enter your mailbox number Enter your password See page 2 for procedure 4 Place an outgoing call * Return to Main Menu Main Menu Listen to Messages 1 New / Old Messages 2 Change Folders 3 Advanced Options 4 Record New 0 Mailbox Options * Main Menu # EXIT 0 New Messages 1 Old Messages 2 Work Messages 3 Family Messages 4 Archived Messages # Cancel 1 Record your unavailable message 2 Record your busy message (Not used currently) 3 Record your name 4 Record / Remove your temporary greeting 5 Change your password * Return to the Main Menu Options During Playback Options After Playback * Rewind 3 seconds # Fast forward 3 seconds 0 Pause playback 1 Skip to message playback 2 Rewind to message start 6 Play next message 7 Delete message 8 Forward/Reply message 9 Save message 3 Advanced options 4 Previous message 5 Repeat message 6 Play next Message 7 Delete message 8 Forward/Reply message 9 Save message * Return to Main Menu # EXIT See page 2 Save Message 9 To save Select which folder to save to 0-4 Advanced Options 1 Send a reply 2 Call the person who sent this message 3 Hear the message envelope (details) 4 Place an outgoing call * Return to Main Menu See page 2 Temporary Greeting 1 Record your temp greeting 2 Erase your temp greeting Rev 3a Copyright Star2Star Communications, LLC. All rights reserved. Star2Star is a registered trademark of Star2Star Communications. 1 Edition Eleven Page 278 of 289

279 Voic Guide 4 Record New Message Prompt to enter extension(s) to send message to multiple locations. 1 Enter extension (example 100# or xxyyy# where xx is location code and yyy is extension number) -or- 2 To use the Directory Enter more extensions as needed *To delete previous entry # When address(es) are entered to begin recording message (You may press # to skip prompt at any time) 1 Stop/Start Recording 2 Listen To Recording 3 Re-record message * Cancel Recording # Send recorded message * Cancel message send (When you are done the system returns you to the top level activity menu) Replying to Messages Press 8 While listening or after hearing message Press 1 To forward message to another user Press 2 To send a reply Press 1 to reply with original voice mail attached Press 2 to reply without original voice mail attached Press * to cancel (When you are done the system returns you to the previous menu) Forwarding Messages Press 8 While listening or after hearing message You are prompted to enter address(s) to forward message 1 Enter extension (example 100# or xxyyy# where xx is location code and yyy is extension number) -or- 2 To use the Directory Press 1 to prepend or reply with original voice mail attached Press 2 to reply without original voice mail attached *To delete previous entry Press # to send forwarded message or press * to cancel Rev 3a Copyright 2012, Star2Star Communications, LLC. All rights reserved. Star2Star is a registered trademark of Star2Star Communications. 2 Edition Eleven Page 279 of 289

280 Voic StarTips Saving Messages Changing folders allows you to listen to old or previously stored messages. This function is rather like storing files in folders on your PC. To save messages: Listen to a message Press 9 to save You will be prompted to select a folder to save the message to Select which folder: 0 New Messages 1 Old Messages 2 Work Messages 3 Family Messages 4 Archived Messages # Cancel (Note) The system automatically deletes messages that are more than 90 days old. If you wish to keep messages indefinitely save them in the Archived folder (4). Messages in the Archived folder are not automatically purged. Mailbox Options Select Mailbox Options (option 0 then option 3) to rerecord your name. This was recorded when you first set up your mailbox. Select Mailbox Options (option 0 then option 4) to record your temporary greeting. This is the greeting you should use for periods of vacation etc. To remove this message once recorded, select Mailbox Options (option 0 then option 4) record your temporary greeting again and you will be prompted with an option to remove the temporary greeting. Once removed the mailbox will revert back to playing callers your unavailable message. (Note) When selecting Option 0 in the voic system with an active temporary greeting, the system will prompt with a reminder. Select Mailbox Options (option 0 then option 5) to change your password. (Note) see section Setting up your Voic in the Phone and Features Guide for guidance on changing your password via the Star2Star portal. When sending Voic to other locations, you may enter extension(s) as xxyyy# where xx is the location id and yyy is the extension number. To skip a prompt, you may press # at any time during the prompt. System Prompts The system provides the following user prompts when leaving messages: If your extension has no name recorded for voic a caller would hear The person at extension (Your extension number) is unavailable please leave your message after the tone. When done hang up or press the # key. If your extension has a name recorded for voic a caller would hear (Your name) is unavailable please leave your message after the tone. When done hang up or press the # key. If your extension has an unavailable message recorded for voic a caller would hear (Your unavailable message), please leave your message after the tone. When done hang up or press the # key. If your extension has a temporary message recorded for voic a caller would hear (Your temporary message), please leave your message after the tone. When done hang up or press the # key. (Note) When reaching a persons voic prompt you may press 0 to reach an operator before leaving a message. If you want to leave a message and also reach an operator press #. The system prompts giving the option to press 1 to save the message and then call an operator or just wait on the line to reach the operator. Shortcut to Voic To leave a voic for another user without ringing their phone, or to transfer a call directly to a person s voic , dial 6xxx (xxx being the extension to send the voic to). Press # to skipthe persons voic greeting. Internal VM Access Access your mailbox by pressing the Messages / Msgs / MSG key or by dialing Enter your password. External VM Access Typically a System Administrator would provide external access to the voic system via a hidden prompt in an Auto Attendant Menu e.g. * or via a separate number to dial that just accesses the voic system. Contact your System Administrator or Dealer for access details. Rev 3a Copyright 2012, Star2Star Communications, LLC. All rights reserved. Star2Star is a registered trademark of Star2Star Communications. 3 Edition Eleven Page 280 of 289

281 33. Voic to Phone users can enable the feature which will send their Voic to and/or Pager/Cell Phone Address. The is sent with a WAV file attachment for listening to the message. The Pager/Cell Phone will receive a text notification with no attached WAV file. 1. Access the Star2Star portal and select the CONFIGURATION option at the top of the page. 2. (Note) If you do not have a login please contact your System Administrator or Dealer. 3. Select the Voic option under I N D I V I D U A L P H O N E S E T T I N G S to send voic to /pager/cell phone. The following options may also be configured in the same setup screen:- System speaks the caller ID prior to speaking the message. System speaks the Date/Time prior to speaking the message. Determine how long the users phone should ring before the call is sent to voic . Determine how many days voic will remain before automatic deletion. Change the user s voic pin. Click here to change the voic PIN / Password Edition Eleven Page 281 of 289

282 33. Voic to (contd) 4. To configure I N D I V I D U A L P H O N E S E T T I N G S to enable the voic to feature, set the option to yes and enter a valid address as per the example below. You may also set the option to send a message to a Pager/cell Phone Address by entering a valid number in the correct format. Set the option to yes and enter a valid address. You may also set the system to send an alert message to a Page/Cell Phone Address. Individual Phone Settings Extension Summary screen. This screen shows what features are set for each user at a glance. In this example David Jones [100] now has Find-Me / Follow-Me set and Voic to / Pager/Cell Phone as per the examples above. Edition Eleven Page 282 of 289

283 33. Voic to (contd) 1. Additional notification that a voic has been received can be achieved by setting the /Pager/Cell Phone option. (Note) sending notification to a cell phone using text messaging (SMS), differs for each mobile provider. A common list of providers is provided below. However Star2Star cannot guarantee the functionality with a third party device. Contact your mobile provider to ensure that your device supports this feature and to verify the correct format. Please be aware that this is not a free service unless it is included in your mobile plan. Mobile Service Providers to SMS Gateways (Cell Phone Text Message Alerts) AT&T Use the format [email protected] T-Mobile USA Use the format [email protected] Verizon Wireless Use the format [email protected] Sprint PCS Use the format [email protected] Sprint PCS - Short Mail Use the format [email protected] Alltel Use the format [email protected] Bellsouth Use the format [email protected] US Cellular Use the format number@ .uscc.net Virgin Mobile USA Use the format [email protected] Metro PCS Use the format [email protected] Metro PCS Use the format [email protected] (Note) ensure you enter the correct format for your cell phone. Entering the number alone will not work. Edition Eleven Page 283 of 289

284 34. Find-Me / Follow-Me Users are provided with powerful functionality to re direct calls via an intuitive web screen. Callers will follow the Find-Me / Follow-Me configuration, if set, to locate their party. There are 3 configuration styles available for this functionality:- Find Me (Immediate) Calls are immediately diverted / forwarded to an alternative number. Find Me (Sequential) Calls can follow a sequence of ringing up to 4 alternative numbers in turn with varying timeout values. Find Me (All) Calls can ring up to 4 alternative numbers simultaneously. 1. Access the Star2Star portal and select the CONFIGURATION option at the top of the page. 2. (Note) If you do not have a login please contact your System Administrator or Dealer. 3. Select the Find-Me / Follow-Me option under I N D I V I D U A L P H O N E S E T T I N G S Select users here. Individual Phone Settings Extension Summary screen. This screen shows what features are set for each user at a glance. In this example David Jones [100] does not have the Find-Me / Follow-Me feature set. 1. Set the Find-Me / Follow-Me feature by checking the option Check this box to enable / disable the Find-Me / Follow-Me feature. 2. In the example below the Find-Me / Follow-Me feature is now set for immediate. Calls to David Jones [100] will forward immediately to the alternative number set for a period of 20 seconds. Callers, if unanswered in that timeframe, will receive David Jones [100] Voic . Find-Me / Follow-Me feature is enabled. Style is set to immediate. Forwarded calls will ring the (941) number for 20 seconds after which time they will reach David Jones [100] Voic . Edition Eleven Page 284 of 289

285 34. Find-Me / Follow-Me (contd) 3. Select the life raft icon to view help on the Find-Me / Follow-Me feature. Selecting the life raft icon above will display help. A full description of the Find-Me / Follow-Me feature is displayed including comments on diverting calls to cell phones or lines answered by an answer machine. 4. Setting the Find-Me / Follow-Me feature to Sequential. See the example below. The call will ring David Jones [100] extension for 20 seconds before following the Find-Me / Follow- Me configuration. The call will then ring extension 101 for 20 seconds before moving off to ring extension 103 for a further 20 seconds. Finally the call will route externally to again for 20 seconds. If the call remains unanswered by a person, answering machine or cell phone voic , then the call will reach the voic of David Jones [100]. Edition Eleven Page 285 of 289

286 34. Find-Me / Follow-Me (contd) 5. View the Individual Phone Settings Extension Summary screen below to see what features are set for your extension. Individual Phone Settings Extension Summary screen. This screen shows what features are set for each user at a glance. In this example David Jones [100] now has Find-Me / Follow-Me set as per the examples above. 35. CallerID Blocking This option allows a user to prevent unwanted calls from reaching their extension. Incoming callers, when blocked, will hear fast busy for approximately 5 seconds prior to disconnection. Blocked numbers can be allowed again by simply deleting the entry. (Note) this feature is not available when the extension is called via a Ring Group or Menu. Use your Star2Star Portal login, select CONFIGURATION to change the settings associated with the CallerID Blocking feature. If you do not have a login please contact your System Administrator or Dealer. 1. Select the CallerID Blocking option under I N D I V I D U A L P H O N E S E T T I N G S 2. Remember to Save Changes to PBX when done. Remember to Save Changes to PBX when done Enter the number to be blocked here then select add. Please enter the full number including the area code. Edition Eleven Page 286 of 289

287 36. Inter-Location Dialing 1. If your company has multiple Star2Star systems/locations you may dial other extension users in those locations by prefixing their extension number by a 2 digit code. This is a free internet telephone call. (Note) You may also use the Intercom and Direct Dial to Voic features over your system wide locations. 2. To view other locations in your organization use your Star2Star Portal login, select CONFIGURATION to use the Print Company Directory feature. If you do not have a login please contact your System Administrator or Dealer. 3. Select the Print Company Directory option under I N D I V I D U A L P H O N E S E T T I N G S 4. The company directory will show all extension users on your system and any other locations within your business. 5. To dial another user in a different location within your business dial xxyyy where xx is the location code of the other system and yyy is the 3 digit extension number. For example to dial extension 100 in another location with a location code of 21 you would dial The Intercom and Direct Dial to Voic features (see sections Intercom and Direct Dial to Voic ) can operate over different locations for eg. To Intercom a user on extension 100 in location 25 you would dial To send a voic directly to the same user on extension 100 you would dial The same process applies when calling remote extensions on a different location. Edition Eleven Page 287 of 289

288 37. StarDialer for Outlook StarDialer for Outlook integrates your Star2Star Phone System with Microsoft Outlook on any PC running Windows XP. Functionality is provided for local extension users to dial telephone numbers using contacts that already exist in their MS Outlook contact directory. If you would like to have this useful feature loaded on your PC please contact your system administrator or dealer for help. 1. To load the StarDialer application on your PC, click the StarDialer option under I N D I V I D U A L P H O N E S E T T I N G S in the Star2Star Web Portal to download the software. 2. You will be prompted to enter your Star2Star extension number. 3. Once StarDialer has been installed your computer must be restarted. 4. To make a call using the StarDialer application open your contacts tab in MS Outlook. 5. Move your mouse over the name of the contact you wish to dial and press the right mouse key. 6. A menu will be displayed. Move your mouse over the name of the contact you wish to dial and press the right mouse key. A menu will be displayed. 7. Select the Call Contact option. 8. The New Call window will appear. Select the number you wish to dial. 9. The first time you make a call, you must select the Asterisk Line in the applications Dialing Options. This needs to be done once only. 10. Click Dialing Options to select the Asterisk Line (do this once only). 37. StarDialer for Outlook (contd) Edition Eleven Page 288 of 289

289 11. Select Asterisk from the drop down in the Connect using line options. 12. Click OK to close the Dialing Options dialog box. 13. Click Start Call to dial. 14. Your extension will ring. 15. Answer the call and you will connect to the number you selected to call. 38. CAC (Call Accounting Codes) A CAC, if configured on your system, provides the ability to account for calls based upon number dialed and call duration. This information is reflected in the Call Detail Records (Reports). Typical application would be when a customer charges back to a client. The codes are enabled and added in the Phone System Configuration / Extensions section of the portal. If enabled the system prompts for the Call Accounting Code. However calls can be made without using a CAC simply by pressing # when prompted. 39. PAC (Personal Authorization Codes) A PAC, if configured on your phone, provides the ability to ensure that all phone users enter a code to dial any non local (> than 7 digits) number. A call cannot be completed without a valid code. This information will be reflected in the Call Detail Records (Reports). This feature is enabled via the Phone System Configuration / Location Information section of the Portal by your system administrator or dealer. PAC codes are entered in the same Location Information page. Edition Eleven Page 289 of 289